Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dear Client,Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 147 GTA has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your vehicle.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterise this Alfa 147 GTA.
The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organisation is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
What’s more, every single component of the Alfa 147 GTA is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan, any Alfa Romeo
dealer would be pleased to make arrangements for your car to be recycled.
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Have a good trip.

This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 147 GTA, so you should only consider the information concerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.

1

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VERY IMPORTANT!
FUEL CAPACITY

K

Ronly use unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N.

STARTING THE ENGINEEngines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral; press the
clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as
the engine starts.
Engines with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows position N).
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIALWhile working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine needles or
any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENTU

The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment.

2

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ACCESSORY ELECTRICAL DEVICES쇵

If after purchasing the car you wish to install accessories that need an electrical supply (with the risk of gradually draining
the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will assess the overall electrical absorption and check whether the
car system is able to withstand the load required.

CODE CARD
Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. It is advisable to always keep the electronic code on the CODE card with you in caseemergency starting is necessary.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance makes it possible to preserve vehicle peformance levels and safety, respect for the environment andlow running costs unaltered over the course of time.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK...
…you will find important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and vehicle maintenance overtime. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (protecting the environment) â (vehicle safety).

3

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or to
our branch offices or any point of the Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo and to
the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guideThis contains Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The services can be recognised by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organisation in Italy can be found in the telephone directory under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all of the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.

4

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects
which should, in particular, be closely studied.

PERSONAL
SAFETYPROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT

Warning. Partially or
fully ignoring these rules may lead toserious injury.

This indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to prevent the vehicle fromdamaging the environment.

VEHICLESAFETY

Warning. Partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage beingcaused to the vehicle which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeitureof the warranty cover.

The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle
at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during
production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.

5

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS

THE ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM

On some of the components making up
your Alfa 147 GTA, or near to them,special coloured labels have been attached.
These labels bear symbols that remind youof the precautions to be taken as regards thatparticular component.
A summary list of the symbols (fig. 1) is
to be found under the bonnet.
A0A0411m

To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the key isremoved from the ignition. In fact the gripof each key contains an electronic device
which modulates the radio frequency signaltransmitted when the engine is started by aspecial aerial incorporated in the ignition
switch. This modulated signal is the “password” by which the control unit recognises
the key and only in this condition can theengine be started.

KEYS
Two keys are delivered together with thecar, (A-fig. 2) with metal insert and remote control function.
The key remote control operates:– Centralised door unlocking/locking– Tailgate opening– Electronic alarm on/off (if existing)– Window and sunroof (if existing) unlocking/locking.

A0A0002m

6

fig. 2

fig. 1

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– The ignition switch-– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock
– The passenger’s side air-bag deactivation– The fuel tank plug lock.
IMPORTANT To guarantee the perfect
efficiency of the electronic devices containedin keys, avoid letting tem directly exposed
to sunrays.
Together with the keys the CODE card isprovided (fig. 3), bearing in print the key
codes (both mechanical and electronic for
emergency start up).
The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place, not in the car.

The driver should always keep the electronic code given on the CODE card withhim/her in the event of having to carry out
emergency starting.

If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and theCODE card.
WARNING - U.K. VEHICLES ONLY
At the behest of the motor insurance companies the CODE card for emergency starting and remplacement of keys is not provided. If you need assistance please contact
your nearest Alfa Romeo Dealer or telephone
free phone 0800 717000.

A0A0003m

fig. 3For versions/markets where applicable,
the key with remote control (fig. 4) is fitted with:– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– a button (B) for remote door unlocking and at the same time switching off theelectronic alarm– a button (C) for remote door locking
and at the same time switching on the electronic alarm– a button (D) for remote boot unlocking– removable hook ring (E)– a button (F) for power-assisted openingof the metal insert.

A0A0705m

7

fig. 4

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The key metal insert operates:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The metal insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock– the passenger’s side Air bag deactivating switch– the fuel cap lock.

WARNING
When pressing the button(F), take care to preventthe metal insert from causing harmor damage when it comes out. The
button (F) should only be pressed
when the key is away from thebody, in particular from the eyes,
and from objects that can be spoilt(clothes for instance). Make surethe key can never be touched byothers, especially children, who
may inadvertently press the button (F).

To insert the metal insert in the key grip,
keep the button (F) pressed and turn theinsert in the direction shown by the arrow
until hearing the click as it locks into place.
Then release the button (F).
To unlock the doors by remote control,press button (B), the doors unlock and the
direction indicators flash twice. To lock thedoors by remote control, press button (C),the doors lock and the direction indicators
flash once. Pressing button (B) the doors
are released, if within the next 60 seconds
a door or the tailgate are not opened, thesystem automatically locks everything
again.
On cars fitted with electronic alarm system,
pressing button (B) turns it off, pressing button (C) turns it on while the transmitter
sends the code to the receiver. This code(rolling code) varies at each transmission.
IMPORTANT If when pressing button(B, C or D) the control is rejected or is not
performed, the battery should be replaced
by a new one of the same type to be foundc/o normal retailers.

8

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OPENING THE TAILGATEThe tailgate can be opened from outside
by remote control pressing button (D), even
if the electronic alarm is on. Opening of the
tailgate is accompanied by the direction indicators flashing twice; closing is accompanied by a single flash.
If the electronic alarm is fitted, when the
tailgate is opened the alarm system switches off volumetric protection and the tailgate
control sensor, the system (with the exception of versions for certain markets) “beeps”
twice.

OPERATION
Each time the ignition key is turned to the
STOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine
electronic control unit.
Each time the car is started turning the ignition key to MAR, the Alfa Romeo CODE
control unit sends a recognition code to theengine control unit to deactivate the inhibitor. The code is crypted and variable between over four billion possible combinations, and it is sent only if the system control system has recognised the code transmitted from the key which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial woundaround the ignition switch.

If the code has not been recognised correctly, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(Y) on the cluster turns on.
In this case, the key should be moved to
the STOP position and then back to MAR;if the lock continues, possibly try again withthe other key provided with the car. If it isstill not possible to start the car, follow the
instructions given in the “In an emergency”
chapter and then contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
IMPORTANT Every key has its own
code, which must be memorised by the system control unit. To memorise new keys, up
to a maximum of eight, apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorised Services taking withyou all the keys in your possession,the CODE
card, a personal identity document and the
car’s ownership documents.

The codes of any keys notpresented during the memorising procedure are
erased. The reason for this is to ensure that any lost or stolen keys
cannot be used to start the engine.

IMPORTANT Turning on of the Alfa
Romeo CODE warning light (Y) when travelling with the ignition key at MAR:GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system (with the exception of versions for certain markets)“beeps” twice.

1) If the warning light turns on, this meansthat the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop). At the first stop,
it will be possible to test the system: switch
off the engine turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the ignition key to MAR
again: the warning light turns on and should
go off in about one second. If the warning
light stays on repeat the procedure described
previously leaving the key at STOP for over
30 seconds. Should the inconvenience persist, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

9

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

2) Should the warning light not be on at
the same time as the display of “IMMOBILIZ. NOT PROGRAMMED” on the re-configurable multifunction display, this means thatthe car is not protected by the engine blockdevice. Contact immediately the Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to have all the keys
stored.

KEY BATTERYREPLACEMENT

Battery replacement:

If when pressing button (B, C or Dfig. 4) the control is rejected or is not performed, the battery should be replaced bya new one of the same type to be found c/onormal retailers.

– press button (A-fig. 5) and move themetal insert (B) to the open position;– using a finely-tipped screwdriver, turnthe opening device (C) and pull out the battery holder (D);– replace the battery (E) making sure thatthe bias is correct;– re-insert the battery holder in the key
and lock it, turning the device (C).

Should the warning lightturn on at the same time as
the display of the message“IMMOBILIZ. NOT PROGRAMMED”
on the re-configurable multifunction display, 2 seconds after the ignition key has been set to the position MAR, this means that the
key codes have not been stored,
and hence the car is not protectedagainst possible theft by the Alfa
Romeo CODE system. In this casecontact the Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service for storing the key codes.

10

Used batteries are harmful to the environment.
They should be disposed ofas specified by law in the special
containers provided. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.
A0A0006m

fig. 5

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
DESCRIPTION
The system comprises: a transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors. The electronic alarm is controlled
by the receiver incorporated in the instrument cluster and it is turned on and off by
the remote control in the key which sends
the crypted and variable code. The electronic
alarm controls: the unlawful opening ofdoors, bonnet and boot (perimetral protection), operation of the ignition key, battery
cable cutting, the presence of moving bodies in the passenger compartment (volumetric protection) any abnormal raising/sloping of the car (for versions/markets
where applicable) and central door locking.
It also makes it possible to cut off the volumetric protection.

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROLThe receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with incorporated remote control. Should a
new key with remote control be necessary
for any reason during the life of the car, contact directly Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,taking with you the CODE card, a personal
identity document and the car’s ownership
documents.

HOW TO ACTIVATE THE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and boot shut andthe ignition key in the STOP or PARK position (key removed), point the key with remote control in the direction of the car, thenpress and release the button (C-fig. 6).
With the exception of certain markets, thesystem sounds a “beep” and the doors arelocked.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnostic test indicated by a different
flashing frequency of the deterrent led (Afig. 7) on the dashboard. If a fault is detected the system sounds a further warning “beep”.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ELECTRONIC ALARM

A0A0010m

IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor function is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.

11

fig. 6

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Surveillance
After switching on, the flashing of the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard,
indicates the system surveillance mode. The
led flashes throughout this period.
IMPORTANT Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the rulesof the different countries.

Self-diagnostic functions
and door, bonnet, boot control

HOW TO DEACTIVATE THE
ALARM

If, after engaging the alarm, a second“beep” is sounded, switch off the systempressing the button (B-fig. 6), check thatthe doors, bonnet and tailgate are properly
shut, then switch the system on again pressing the button (C).

To deactivate the alarm press the button (Bfig. 6) of the key with remote control. The
system will react as follows (with the exception of certain markets):

Otherwise, the door, bonnet or tailgate thatis not shut properly will be excluded fromthe alarm system control.
If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut correctly and the control signal is repeated, thesystem self-diagnostics has detected a system operating fault. It is therefore necessary
to contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.

A0A0005m

12

fig. 7

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– two brief flashes of the direction indicators– two brief “beeps” of the siren– door unlocking.
IMPORTANT If when the system isturned off the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on
the dashboard stays on (maximum 2 minutes or until the ignition key is set to MAR)the following should be borne in mind:

1 flash:

one or more doors

2 flashes:

tailgate

3 flashes:bonnet4 flashes:

ultrasounds

5 flashes:

abnormal vehicle lifting/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable)

6 flashes:
7 flashes:

WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
When the system is on, the alarm comes
into action in the following cases:– opening of one of the doors, bonnet or
tailgate;– disconnection of the battery or sectioning of electric cables;– intrusion in the passenger compartment,
for example breakage of windows (volumetric protection);– attempt to start the engine (key in
MAR position);tampering with car starting
cables– abnormal car lifting/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable).

tampering with battery cables or cutting emergency
key cables

Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the siren
and hazard warning lights (for about 26 seconds). The ways of operating and the number of cycles may vary depending on themarkets.

8 flashes:

connection line to sensors
and siren

9 flashes:at least three causes ofalarm.

A maximum number of cycles is howeverenvisaged.
Once the alarm cycle has ended, the system resumes its normal control function.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
To make sure that the protection system
works correctly the side windows and sunroof (if fitted) must be properly shut.
The function can be cut off (if, for example, leaving animals in the car) carrying out
the following operations in rapid succession:
starting from the condition with the ignition key at MAR, move the key to STOP,
then immediately back to MAR and thento STOP again, then remove the ignition
key.
The deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard lights up for about 2 seconds to confirm that the function has been cut off.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– if the led continues flashing, but at different intervals than normal, this means thatdifferent attempts to break in have occurred.
Through the number of flashes it is possible to identify the type of attempt:

To restore volumetric protection, move andkeep the ignition key at MAR for over 30
seconds.
If, with the volumetric protection function
deactivated, an electric control controlled by
the ignition key at MAR is required (e.g.
power windows) turn the key to MAR, operate the control and move the key to
STOP in a maximum time of 30 seconds.
This way volumetric protection is not restored.

13

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HOW TO CUT OFF
THE ALARM SYSTEMIGNITION DEVICE

IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start
move the key back to STOP and repeat.

To deactivate the alarm system completely (for instance during prolonged inactivityof the vehicle) simply lock the car turning
the key in the lock.

SWITCH (fig. 8)

The ignition switch has a safety device
which prevents passage to AVV when theengine is running.

MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATION
In accordance with the law in force in eachcountry, on the subject of radio frequency,
we wish to point out that for the markets inwhich the transmitter needs to be marked,
the certification number is given on the component.
Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be given on the transmitter
and/or on the receiver.

The key can be turned to one of four positions:– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine inhibitor engaged, steering lock engaged, services excluded apartfrom those supplied directly (e.g. hazard
warning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.
IMPORTANT Do not leave the key inthis position when the engine is stopped.
– AVV: instable position for starting theengine.

A0A0016m

14

fig. 8Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights switched on automatically.
IMPORTANT To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) on the switch
must be pressed first.

If the ignition device istampered with (for example an attempted theft)
have it checked over by Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services before
travelling again.

STEERING LOCKDOORSEngaging:– move the key to STOP or PARK, thenremove the key and turn the steering wheelslightly to facilitate the locking action.
Disengaging:– turn the key to MAR gently rocking thesteering wheel from side to side.

WARNING
Never remove the ignition
key with the car on themove. The steering wheel would
lock automatically the first time thesteering wheel is turned. This also occurs if the car is towed.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.

WARNING
Before opening a door, always make sure that it canbe done safely.
OPENING/CLOSING FROMOUTSIDETo open the driver's door turn the key
clockwise and to open the passengers' door,
optional for versions/markets where applicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, thenremove the key and press the button (Afig. 9).
To close the door, turn the key in the lockin the opposite direction to the one for opening.
A0A0017m

fig. 9Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
When leaving the vehicle
always remove the key
from the ignition to prevent any occupants of the vehicle from accidentally activating the controls.
Never leave children in the vehicle unaccompanied. Remember toengage the handbrake, and, if thevehicle is parked on an uphill slope,to engage first gear. If the vehicle
is facing downhill, engage reverse
gear.

15

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE
To open the door, pull the handle(A-fig. 10).
To close the door, pull it; then to prevent
opening from outside, press the button (Afig. 11) on the dashboard, the deterrent
led (B) on the actual button lights up witha yellow light to confirm that locking hastaken place.

This allows central locking of the door
locks.
To engage central locking, the doors mustbe perfectly shut, otherwise, locking is denied.
IMPORTANT With central locking engaged, pulling the inside lever for opening
one of the doors causes the unlocking alsoof the other door.

WARNINGAny adjustments are to be
carried out only with thevehicle stationary.

A0A0409m

In the event of a power cut off (blown
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to work the lock by hand.

A0A0018m

16

FRONT SEATSCENTRAL LOCKING

fig. 10

A0A0019m

fig. 11

fig. 12

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)

TILTING THE BACK REST
(fig. 12)Raise the lever (A) and push the seat
backwards or forwards; in the driving position the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) upwards, then work the lever (up and down)
until reaching the required height, then release it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards then work the lever (up anddown) until reaching the required height.

To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated in the driver’s seat.

WARNING
After releasing the adjustment lever, always checkthat the seat is locked on the runners, trying to move it to and from.
The lack of this clamping action
could cause the seat to move unexpectedly and cause loss of vehicle control.

BACK REST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
Turn the knob (C) until reaching the position required.

A recovery mechanism with memory
makes it possible to take the seat back to
its previous position.
Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that it
is correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indicates that the seat back is not camped.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LENGTHWISE ADJUSTMENT(fig. 12)

Also check that the seat is firmly locked on
the runners, trying to move it to and from.
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
Turn the knob (D) until obtaining the most
comfortable position.

17

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 13)
The armrest is adjustable and can be raised
or lowered to the required position.
To adjust, slightly raise the armrest, thenpress the release device (A).
Inside the armrest there is an oddments
compartment, to use it, raise the cover,pressing the device (B).

SEAT WARMING (fig. 14)(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)

REAR POCKETS (fig. 15)(for versions/markets
where applicable)

The seat warming pad can be switched on
and off using switch (A) on the outer sideof the seat.

The front seats are fitted with a pocket in
the rear of the back rest.

Switching on is shown by the lighting upof the led (B) on the switch itself.

A0A0412m

18

fig. 13

A0A0485m

fig. 14

fig. 15

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0413m

EXTENDING THE
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Removing the rear parcel shelf

Total extension

Proceed as follows:

Proceed as follows:– free the ends of the two rods (A-fig.
16) supporting the parcel shelf (B) pullingthe eyelets (C) off the pins (D);– position the seat belt buckles (A-fig.
19) in their housings in the cushion;

The split rear seat makes it possible to extend the luggage compartment totally or partially, acting separately on one of the twoparts, thereby offering different possibilities
of load depending on the number of rearpassengers.

– release the pins (A-fig. 17) at the outside of the shelf from their housings (B) obtained in the side supports, then remove theshelf pulling it outwards.

WARNING
If a particularly heavy load
is placed in the boot, whentravelling at night, it is wise tocheck the height of the high beams(see “Headlamps” paragraph).

– crossways in the luggage compartment
as shown in fig. 18;– pull the handles in the centre of the cushions, then tilt them forwards;

After removal the shelf can be placed in
two ways:

A0A0415m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR SEATS– crossways between the front seat backreats and the tilted cushions of the rear seats
if the boot is extended totally (see fig. 22).

fig. 18
A0A0414m

fig. 16

A0A0028m

fig. 17

fig. 19

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0416m

19

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– raise the headrests to the highest position, press both buttons (A-fig. 20) at theside of the two supports, then remove theheadrests pulling them upwards.
– move the seat belts to the side extending them correctly without twisting;– raise the levers (A-fig. 21) retaining
the back rests and tilt them forwards to obtain a single loading surface (fig. 22).
IMPORTANT For versions/markets
where applicable, the retainer levers are replaced by buttons (one for each side). To release the back rests and tilt them, use thebuttons themselves.

Partial extension
For partial extension, proceed as follows:– tilt the cushion required pulling the handle at the centre of the cushion, then tilting the actual cushion;– raise the headrests of the seat to be tilted to the highest position, press both buttons at the side of the two supports and remove the headrests pulling them upwards;– move the seat belt to one side extending it correctly without twisting;– raise the lever retaining the back rest
and tilt it forwards.

To bring the seat back to its
normal position
Proceed as follows:– move the seat belts to the side extending them correctly without twisting;– raise the seat backs, pushing them backwards until hearing both clamping devices
click into place, checking that the “redband” can no longer be seen on the upper
part of the levers (A-fig. 21). In fact, this“red band” indicates that the seat back is
not clamped;– set the cushions to the horizontal position keeping the centre seat belt raised;– refit the headrests.

A0A0469m

20

fig. 20

A0A0031m

fig. 21

fig. 22

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0470m

The car may be fitted with two headrests
for the side seats and, depending on the trim
level, it may also have a third headrest in
the centre.
The headrests have 2 positions(up/down) depending on the height of thepassenger.
In the case of need, it is possible to remove
the headrests as described previously (see“Luggage compartment extension”).

WARNING
Remember that headrests
should be adjusted so thatthe nape, and not the neck, restson them. Only in this position dothey exert their protective actionin the event of a crash from behind.

LUGGAGERETAINER NET
Present only on certain versions, the interior fittings are completed by the luggage retainer net, which is helpful in correctly arranging the load and/or suitable for transporting light materials.
Fig. 25, 26, 27 below show the various
clamping solutions for the net in the boot.
A0A0326m

CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 24)
To use the armrest (A), lower it as illustrated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADREST ADJUSTMENT(fig. 23)

fig. 25
A0A0417m

fig. 23

A0A0418m

fig. 26

fig. 24

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0327m

21

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position in rake and height.

WARNINGAny adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out only with thevehicle stationary.

To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 28)
pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.

WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.

A0A0328m

22

fig. 27INNER
The mirror, fitted with a safety device thatcauses it to be released in the event of aviolent crash, can be moved using the lever(A-fig. 29) to two different positions normal or antiglare.

A0A0038m

fig. 28

A0A0039m

fig. 29

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

REAR-VIEW MIRROR
ADJUSTMENT

Folding (fig. 31)

Defrosting/demisting (fig. 32)

Electric adjustment (fig. 30)– In the event of need (for example whenthe mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirror moving it fromposition (A) to position (B).

The electric mirrors are fitted with heating coils which come into operation withrearscreen heating pressing the button (A)thereby defrosting and/or demisting the mirrors.

– use the switch (A) to select the mirror
required (right or left);– pressing the button (B), in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected previously;– Position the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible only with the ignition key at MAR.

WARNING
When driving the mirrors
should always be in position (A).

IMPORTANT The function is timed andautomatically switched off after a few minutes.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OUTER

WARNINGAs the driver’s wing mirror
is curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.

A0A0040m

fig. 30

A0A0041m

fig. 31

fig. 32

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0486m

23

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

POWER WINDOWSThe power windows are fitted with a safety system with crush-prevention seals. The
electronic control unit that operates the system is capable of detecting the presence ofan obstacle during the window closing motion through the special seals. Should thisoccur, the system stops the movement of
the window and reverses it immediately.
IMPORTANT If the crush-preventionfunction is operated for 3 times in 1 minute,the system automatically sets to the recovery mode (self-protection). To reset the correct system operating logic, use the control
button. The window will rise in predefined
steps until closing completely. The logic isreset and if there are no faults, the window
winder automatically resumes normal operation; if not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Driver’s side (fig. 33)

Passenger’s side (fig. 34)

The driver’s door panel contains the buttons that control the following windows,
with the ignition key at MAR:The button (A) controls the passenger’s
side window.

A - left front window
B - right front window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.
IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with the “continuous automatic operation” device for both lowering and raising
the window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the window
stops in the required position by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button
again.

IMPORTANT With the ignition key at
STOP or removed, the power windows remain activated for about 3 minutes and aredeactivated immediately the moment a door
is opened.

24

A0A0043m

fig. 33

A0A0044m

fig. 34

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT The passenger side power window is provided with an “automatic
continuous operation” device both to lower and to raise the window. A brief push on
the upper or lower part of the button is sufficient to start the run which continues automatically: the window stops at the required position by pushing once again indifferently the upper or lower part of the button.

IMPORTANT After locking the doors,
keeping the corresponding button of the remote control pressed for about 2 seconds
causes automatic closing of the windows
and sunroof (if present). The remote control
button should be pressed until the windows
have completed their stroke; releasing the
button sooner, the windows stop in the position they are in at that moment.
On all versions, after unlocking the doors,
keeping the remote control button pressed
for about 2 seconds the windows and sunroof (if present) are opened.

SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 35) and insert it into the buckle (B), until hearing thelocking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again without
jerking.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Improper use of power
windows can be dangerous. Before and during use, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harm either directly by the moving windows or by personal objects drawn
or knocked by them. When leaving
the car, always remove the ignition
key to prevent the power windows
from being operated inadvertently, and harming anyone left onboard.

A0A0045m

Do not keep the buttonpressed when the window
is completely raised or
lowered.

fig. 35

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

25

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To unfasten the seat belts, press button(C). Guide the seat belt with your hand while
it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat belts
with three anchor points with reel for theside seats and for the centre seat (fig. 36).

WARNING
Never press button (C)when travelling.

WARNING
When the seat back is coupled properly, the “redband” (B) next to the seat backlevers (A) disappears. The “redband” actually indicates improper
seat back coupling (fig. 36a). When
resetting it in proper position,
make sure to hear the locking click.

Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.

26

WARNING
Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on bothsides (not visible “red bands” (B))
to prevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengers
should you brake sharply.

A0A0386m

A0A0708m

fig. 36afig. 36

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
After tilting, when resetting the rear seat instraight position, take care to reposition the seat belt properly tohave it ready for use.

WARNING
Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any
passengers occupying the rearseats who are not wearing a seatbelt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk but constitutea danger to the occupants of thefront seats.
When the rear seats are not occupied, use
the spaces provided in the cushion to stow
the belt buckles.

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
The front seat belt ring can take different
positions which make it possible to adjust
the height of the belts.
Always adjust the height of the belts adapting it to the person who is wearing it. This
precaution improves their effectiveness. substantially reducing the risk of injury in theevent of a crash.

WARNING
After adjustment, always
check that the slider (Bfig. 38) is anchored in one of thepositions provided. To do this, withthe button (A-fig. 38) released, exert a further pressure to allow theanchor device to catch if release did
not take place at one of the preset positions.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end of theshoulder and the neck.
To adjust, lower or raise the grip (Afig. 38) of the locking device, at the sametime moving the ring (B) to the most appropriate of the allowed positions.

A0A0387m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGTo offer the highest level ofprotection, the rear seatbelts should be fastened as shownin fig. 36.

WARNING
Make the height adjustment when the car is stationary.

A0A0419m

LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passive safety, the front seatbelt reels contain a load limiter which allows
controlled sag in such a way as to dose theforce acting on the shoulders during the belt
restraining action.

fig. 37

27

fig. 47

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, Alfa 147 GTA is fitted with pretensioning devices.
These devices “feel” that the car is being
subject to a violent impact by way of a sensor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be
drawn back up even when guiding it manually.

IMPORTANT The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into buckles.
A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.
The emergency tensioning retractor needs
no maintenance or lubrication. Any modification to its original features will nullify theretractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusual
natural events (floods, high waves, etc.),
the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced.

28

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it
replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service. The validity of the device
is written on the plate located on
the front left door near the lock.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have pretensioner replaced as this date approaches.

Operations
involvingbanging, vibrations or
heating (above 100°C fora maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damage
or trigger off the device. Vibrations
from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused by mounting
pavements etc. do not have any effect on the pretensioner. If, however, you need assistance, go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
To ensure the highest degree of protection, you arerecommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest position
possible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis. Seat belt
should always be worn in both thefront and rear positions! Travellingwithout seat belt increases the riskof serious injury or death in thecase of accident.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSFOR THE USE OF THE
SEAT BELTS

WARNING
The seat belt must not be
twisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper part
must pass over the shoulder anddiagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across thepelvis and not across the stomach
to eliminate the risk of sliding forwards (fig. 39). Do not use devices(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keep
the belts away from the body.

All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.

WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the components ofthe seat belts and pretensioner betampered with or removed. Any
operation should be carried out by
qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

A0A0420m

fig. 39

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Never disassemble or tamper with the pretensioner
components. All interventions must
be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

29

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it must
be completely replaced together
with the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.

– After a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.

Pregnant women must of course position
the lower part of the belt very low down sothat it passes under the abdomen (fig. 41).

– To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.

HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS– Prevent the reels from getting wet: correct operation of them is only guaranteed
if water does not get inside.

– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments.

– Replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.

WARNING
Do not carry children on
your knee using a single
seat belt for both (fig. 40). Do notfasten other objects to the body.
A0A0421m

30

fig. 40

fig. 41

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0422m

For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER! Never place cradle child’s seats on thefront passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air
bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is themost protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seatsmust absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passenger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Children
may placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning light
F on dial to make sure that deactivation has actually took place (see paragraph “Front and side air bags“ at item “Front passenger air bag“). The
front passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backward position toprevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.

This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all European
Community countries.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is proportionately larger and heavier than the restof the body, while muscles and bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restraint them correctly inthe event of a crash, different systems areneeded then adult seat belts.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

A0A0388m

31

fig. 42

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE-R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 0

until 10 kg in weightGroup 0+

until 13 kg in weightGroup 1

9-18 kg in weightGroup 2

15-25 kg in weightGroup 322-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group (fig. 42).
All the restraint devices must bear the homologation data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely not be removed.

GROUP 0 and 0+

GROUP 1Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind (fig. 43) on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce
strain on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration.

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 44),through which the car seat belt restrains bothchild and seat.

The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporated on it.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear belts normally.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

A0A0389m

A0A0390m

The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes
seats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experimented for Alfa Romeo cars.

32

fig. 43

fig. 44

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GROUP 2

GROUP 3

Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part
adheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen (fig.
45).

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest any more.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

WARNING
The illustration is indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions provided
with it.

fig. 46 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m in height, children may wear
seat belts like adults.

A0A0391m

fig. 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0392m

fig. 46

Alfawiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weightgroups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and its own
belts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion.
Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.

33

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Alfa 147 GTA complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to
the following table:
Versions rear seats

Group

Range of weight

SEAT
Front passenger

Rear sidepassenger seat

Rear centre
passenger seat(inertial seat belt withthree anchor points)

Group 0,0+

0 - 13 kg

L

U

U

Group 1

9 -18 kg

L

U

U

Group 215 - 25 kg

L

U

U

Group 322 - 36 kg

L

U

U

Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups“
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group34

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1) The recommended position for installing a child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the event of acrash.

4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.
5) All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at thesame time.
6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.

FRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 47), for the passenger (fig.
48), side bags (fig. 49) and window bags
(fig. 50).

7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.

WARNING
If a passenger’s air bag isinstalled, children should
never travel on the front seat.

A0A0487m

8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold of them in a crash.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Below is a summary of the safety rules to be observed when carrying children:9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.

2) If the passenger’s Air bag is deactivated always, check the warning light F
on the cluster to make sure that it has actually been deactivated.

fig. 47
A0A0488m

3) Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplier is obliged to attach. Keep them in the
car together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without the
instructions for use.
fig. 48

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

35

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

It is formed of a cushion that inflates instantaneously contained in a special recess:

FRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a safety device which comes into actionin the event of a head-on collision.

A0A0423m– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;– in the dashboard and with a bigger cushion for the passenger.
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)has been designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on crashes of mediumhigh severity, by placing the cushion between the occupant and the steering wheel
or dashboard.
In the case of a crash, an electronic control unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and, when necessary
triggers inflation of the cushion.

fig. 49
A0A0424m

The cushion inflates instantaneously, setting itself between the body of the front occupants and the structures that could cause
injury. The cushion then deflates immediately afterwards.
The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

36

fig. 50

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.
Front air bags designeed to protect car’s
occupants in front crashes and therefore nonactivation in other types of collusions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc...)is not a system malfunction
In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of ice
or snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from behind by another vehicle), side collisions,wedging under other vehicles or protective
barriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail) cutting in of the air bag is not activated as it does not offer any more protection
than the seat belts therefore activation
would be inappropriate.
Therefore the failure to be triggered does
not mean that the system is not working
properly.

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
The passenger’s front air bag has been designed to improve the protection of a person wearing a seat belt.

WARNINGSERIOUS DANGER:
The car is fittedwith front passenger’s air bag.
Never place cradle child’s seats on
the front passenger seat of cars
equipped with passenger air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal. In the case of need, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag
when a child’s seat is placed on thefront seat. The front passenger
seat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent any
contact between child’s seat anddashboard. Even if not ruled bylaw, for better protection of adults
you are recommended to reactivate the air bag immediately assoon as child transport is no longer
necessary.

MANUAL DEACTIVATIONOF PASSENGER’S FRONTAIR BAG
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
front air bag can be deactivated.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in thespecial key switch on the right-hand side ofthe dashboard (fig. 51). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-bag cover on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place objects on the dashboard passenger’s
side (such as mobile phones) because they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.

A0A0061m

Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the dashboard and thepassenger.

fig. 51

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

37

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ignition key removed.
The key-operated switch (fig. 51) has
two positions:1) Passenger’s front Air bag activated:(ON position P) warning light on instrument cluster off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on instrument cluster on; it is possible to carry achild protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.
The warning light F on the cluster stays
on permanently until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
Deactivation of the passenger’s front Air
bag does not inhibit operation of the side Air
bag.
When the door is open, the key can beinserted and removed in both positions.

SIDE AIR BAGS(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)
The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occupants in the event of a side crash of medium-high severity.
They are formed of an instantaneously-inflating cushion:– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is always possible to have the cushion in the optimum position in relation to the passenger,
regardless of the adjustment of the seat;– the window bags, which are “curtain“cushions, are housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which makes it
possible to extend the cushion downwards.
This solution, designed to protect the head,
makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the wide
cushion inflation surface.
In the event of a side crash, an electronic
control unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.

38

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The bags inflate instantaneously, setting
themselves between the body of the front
passengers and the car door. The bags deflate immediately afterwards.
In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violent
crashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replace
but are complementary to the use of belts,
which you are recommended to always
wear, as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag deactivation switch, as described in the previous paragraphs.

WARNING
Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on thewindows and in the window bagarea to prevent possible injuries
during the inflation phase.

IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjected
to heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violent
bumps against steps, pavements or fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.

IMPORTANT The triggering of air bags
releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployedbag and the car interior may be covered withdusty residue: this may irritate the skin andeyes. In the event of exposure, wash withneutral soap and water.

WARNING
Never lean head, arms andelbows out of the window.

All operations involving checking, repairing and replacing components concerning
the Air bag must be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services should be contacted beforehand to have the system deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructions
for use and of the above warnings and be
given this “Owner’s Manual“.
IMPORTANT The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.

The airbag system has a validity of 14
years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10
years for the coil contact (see the plate located on the front left door near the lock).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for
replacement as these dates approach.
IMPORTANT If an accident has triggered the air bag, Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services must be contacted to have the devices activated replaced and to have thewhole system checked.

39

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL CAUTIONSWARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning theignition key to MAR or if it stays on
when travelling, this could indicate afailure in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in the eventof collision or, in a restricted numberof cases, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the car contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services to have the system checked immediately.
WARNING
Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims orcovers there are not set for the useof side bags.
WARNING
Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of thechest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. between your lips. Serious injury may
result in the case of the air bag being triggered.

WARNING
Always keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles. Do not drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back wellagainst it.

WARNING
If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been subjected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-bag cover on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place objects on the dashboard passenger’s
side (such as mobile phones) because they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.

WARNINGYou are reminded thatwhen the ignition key isengaged and in the MAR position,
the Air bags can be triggered also
on a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even with the car
stationary, never allow children on
the front seat. You are also reminded that with the car stationary, without the key engaged andturned, the Air bags are not triggered in the event of an impact; inthis case the failure to trigger the
air bags should not be considereda system failure.

40

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The front Air bags are designed to be triggered forheavier crashes than the pretensioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be triggered for crashes within the two
activation thresholds.

WARNING
Do not wash the seat backwith pressurised water or
steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).

WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the
support handles.

WARNING
The air bag does not replace the seat belts, but increases their effectiveness. Additionally, as the front air bags are
not triggered for head-on collision
at low speed, side crashes, crashes from behind or overturning, inthese cases the occupants are protected only by the seat belts, whichmust, therefore, always be fastened.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Turning the ignition key to
MAR the F warning light(with the passenger’s front Air bag
deactivation switch at ON) turns
on for about 4 seconds, and then
flashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Air
bag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.

41

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSTEERING
WHEEL LEVERS

Sidelights (fig. 53)

Main beams (fig. 55)

The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.

The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be activated with the ignition key at MAR.

The 3 warning light on the instrument
cluster will come on at the same time.

To turn main beams on, set knurled ring
to position 2, push the lever towards thedashboard (stable position); warning light
1 on the instrument panel will turn on.

Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 54)

To set dipped-beams back pull the lever towards the steering wheel.

LEFT-HAND LEVER

These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to 2.

The left-hand lever controls the outer lights
except the fog lamps and rear fog guards.

A0A0063m

A0A0065m

When the outer lights are switched on, thevarious controls on the dashboard are illuminated.
Only with the ignition key at PARK, regardless of the position of the knurled ring,
the side lights and number plate lights stayon.
Position (1 or 2-fig. 57) of the levercauses the turning on only of the side lights(front and rear), on the right or left respectively.

fig. 52

fig. 54
A0A0064m

A0A0066m

Lights switched off (fig. 52)
When the pointer on the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O the outer lights are
switched off.

42

fig. 53

fig. 55

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– as the high beams are turned on, thelow beams turn off, in the meanwhile thefog lights remain on, and the starting conditions are restored, as soon as the low
beams are turned on again;– otherwise, when the high beams areturned on, the fog lights are turned off, andthey will automatically be turned on again
when the high beams are turned off.
Hence, should the Body Computer be replaced, the lights management logic could
differ from the previous one.

Flashing (fig. 56)
The headlights are flashed pulling the levertowards the steering wheel (instable position) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on thecluster will come on at the same time.
IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties follow local
regulations.
Direction indicators (fig. 57)
Regardless of the position of the knurled
ring, moving the lever to the stable position
will:

One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument cluster at thesame time.
The lever is returned to its home position
automatically and the indicators are
switched off when the steering wheel isstraightened.
IMPORTANT If you wish to signal a
rapid change of direction involving only aminimal movement of the steering wheel,
the lever can be moved up or down without
it clicking (unstable position). When released, the lever will return to its home position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

When low beams and fog lights turned
on, the external light control unit (integral
into the Body Computer) can behave according to one of the following logic:

up, position (1) - engage the right-handdirection indicators;
down, position (2) - engage the left-handdirection indicators.

A0A0067m

fig. 56

A0A0068m

fig. 57

fig. 58

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0067m

43

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“Follow me home” device(fig. 58)
This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for the length oftime set, and is activated with the ignition
key at STOP or removed, pulling the lefthand stalk towards the steering wheel.

RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper-washer and rearscreen
wiper-washer. The windscreen washer control also activates the headlamp washers,
if fitted.

Windscreen wiper - washer(fig. 59-60)
The lever can be moved to five different
positions, corresponding to:
A - Windscreen wiper off.
B - Intermittent.

This function is activated pulling the lever
within 2 minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each single movement of thelever, the staying on of the dipped beams
and sidelights is extended by 30 seconds up
to a maximum of 3.5 minutes; the lights
switch off automatically after the time set.

A0A0070m

Each time the lever is operated, the 1
warning light on the cluster turns on.

With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:■= intermittent slow.
■■= intermittent medium.
■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = fast intermittent.
C - Continuous, slow.

This function can be interrupted by keeping the lever pulled towards the steering
wheel for more than 2 seconds.

D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.
IMPORTANT When the wiper is on, engaging reverse gear automatically turns on
the rearscreen wiper.

44

fig. 59

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rain sensor (fig. 61)

Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (instable position) operates the windscreen washer.

The rain sensor (A), fitted only on certain versions, is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper which has
the purpose of automatically adjusting thenumber of wipes during intermittent operation, to the intensity of the rain.

Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time; indeed, the latter comes into action automatically if the lever is pulled for more thanhalf a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke” after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.

Turning the knurled ring (F-fig. 59) it
is possible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker change fromstationary when the windscreen is dry, tofirst continuous speed (continuous, slow).

All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.

Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.

The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 59) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.

Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR“INTELLIGENT WASHING” FUNCTION”

When the rain sensor is reactivated in thisway, the wiper performs at least one stroke,even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate thatreactivation has occurred.
A0A0071m

fig. 60

A0A0489m

45

fig. 61

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turn controls the wiper motor.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.
The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:

Rearscreen wiper-washer(fig. 62-63)
Pushing the lever towards the dashboard(unstable position) operates the rearscreen
washer jet and continuous operation of therearscreen wiper.
Operation ends when the lever is released.

– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);
A0A0073m– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).

Turning the knurled ring (A) from position
O to ' operates the rearscreen wiper intermittently.
Headlamp washers (fig. 64)
These come into operation when the windscreen washer is turned on with thedipped/main beam headlights on.
IMPORTANT On certain versions when
the headlamp washer is operating, the climate control system automatically engages
inside air re-circulation, to prevent the smellof liquid detergent from entering the passenger compartment.

fig. 62
A0A0075m

46

fig. 63

fig. 64

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0425m

The device is disengaged automatically in
any one of the following cases:– pressing the brake pedal;

Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car speed or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.

GENERAL– pressing the clutch pedal;

The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator pedal. This reduces driving fatigue during long
journeys because the speed memorised is
automatically maintained.

– if the ASR or VDC, MSR system cuts in.

Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed memorised.

CONTROLS (fig. 65)

Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.

Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring (B) and by the RES button (C).

Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speed
increases or lowers by about 1.5 km/h.

IMPORTANT The device can only be engaged at speeds above 30 km/h.

Ring (A) has two positions:– OFF in this position the device is deactivated;– ON is the normal operating position of
the device. When the knurled ring (A) isin this position, the warning light Ü on the
instrument cluster turns on.

The RES button (C) resets the memorised
speed.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.

A0A0077m

WARNING
Cruise control must be activated only when theroute and traffic allow a constant
speed for a sufficiently long distance completely safely.

47

fig. 65

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will
be maintained automatically.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CRUISE CONTROLGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TO MEMORISE THE SPEED
Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
The car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following conditions takes place:– pressing the brake pedal;– pressing the clutch pedal;

TO RESETTHE MEMORISED SPEEDTO INCREASE
THE MEMORISED SPEED

If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:

The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;– engage the gear selected at the time of
speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th speed);– press the RES button (C).

– if the ASR or VDC system cuts in.
IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.

48

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning thering (B) for more than three seconds);or2) momentaneously turning the ring (B) to(+): each pulse of the ring will correspond toa slight increase in speed (about 1.5 km/h)
while pressing continuously will correspondto a continuous speed increase. Releasing thering (B) the new speed will be memorised
automatically.

RESETTING THE MEMORISED
SPEED

The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:

The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.

1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

WARNING
When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutral.
It is advisable to engage the cruise control
only when the conditions of the traffic orroad so permit under completely safe conditions, i.e.: straight and dry roads, dual carriageways or motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or in heavy traffic conditions.

WARNING
Cruise Control can only beengaged at speeds above
30 km/h. The max. speed at which
the Cruise Control can be engaged
is 190 km/h, at speeds higher than
190 km/h it will not be engaged.

The device may only be engaged in 4th,
5th or 6th gear, depending on the speedof the car. Travelling downhill with the device engaged the car speed may increase
more than the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.

WARNING
If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services after checking
that the protection fuse is intact.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TO REDUCE
THE MEMORISED SPEED

The ring (A) may be left constantly at ON
without damaging the device. You are, however, advised to switch the device off when
not in use, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
memorising speeds by accident.

49

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDASHBOARD

A0A0426m

fig. 66
1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Outer light control lever - 4. Speedometer with mileage recorder and trip recorderand headlamp aiming display - 5. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - 6. Multifunction display - 7. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge - 8. Rev counter - 9. Tailgate release button - 10. Card holder - 11. Radio - 12. Centre swivel air vents - 13. Fixed upper vent - 14.
Glass holder - 15. Fog lamp button - 16. Hazard warning light switch - 17. Rear fog guard button - 18. Passenger’s front Air bag - 19. Glovebox - 20. Door locking button - 21. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 22. Cigar lighter - 23. Ashtray - 24. Temperature
sensor - 25. Windscreen/rearscreen wiper control lever - 26. Ignition key and switch - 27. Horn - 28. Steering wheel locking/release lever 29. Driver’s front Air bag - 30. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 31. Bonnet opening lever.

50

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INSTRUMENT PANEL
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Display (mileage
recorder, trip meter and headlamp position
display) - E. Reconfigurable multifunction
display - F. Rev counter
REV COUNTER
The rev. counter shows engine rpm. The needle pointed to the danger area (red) indicatesexcessive high engine speed. Do not drive forlong periods with the needle in this area.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow of fuel when the engine is “over-revving” resulting
in a gradual loss of engine power.
When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden highering of
the speed, this is normal as it takes place during normal operation, for example when engaging the climatecontrol system or the fan.
In particular a slow change in the speed preserves the battery charge.

A0A0427m

fig. 67
MILEAGE RECORDER
Display with double meter (total and trip)
and headlamp position display.

IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected the trip meter reading is not stored.

The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)– the trip meter on the second line (4 figures)– the position relating to the headlamp
aiming device.

A0A0466m

To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 68) on the plate at the side of thesteering column pressed for a few seconds.
fig. 68

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

51

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE WITHRESERVE INDICATOR
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
The warning light K turns on to indicate thatapprox. 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.
IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading on
the gauge may differ from the actual amountof fuel in the tank and changes in level may
be indicated late.
This condition falls within the operation logics of the electronic control circuit to avoid
highly unstable readings due to swaying of
the fuel when travelling.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key
to STOP. If the engine is off but the key
is to MAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be
considered as a system malfunctioning.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE WITH
MAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT
This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Normally the pointer should be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer reaches the higher temperatures of the scale (redarea) the request for vehicle performance
should be decreased.
The turning on of the u warning light (onsome versions together with the message
shown on the reconfigurable multifunction
display) indicates that the coolant fluid temperature is too high; in this case, stop theengine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

52

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red zone) when the vehicle is driven at low speeds, especially when the ambient air temperature is high. In this case itis advisable to stop the vehicle and switch
off the engine for a few minutes, after which
the journey can be resumed, preferably ata higher speed.

The reconfigurable multifunction display isable to display all the useful and necessary
information when driving and a menu allows
the following adjustments and/or settings:
TIME
DATE
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
INFORMATION ABOUT VEHICLE CONDITION- Trip computer- Lighting adjustment (rheostat)- Display of failure messages with corresponding symbol- Display of warning messages with corresponding symbol (e.g.: possible ice onroad)

Reconfigurable multifunction
display menu
SPEED
- Activation/deactivation of the corresponding indication (ON/OFF)- Setting the speed limit
TRIP B- Activation/deactivation of the corresponding function (ON/OFF)TIME- Setting the hours- Setting the minutes
DATE- Setting the day- Setting the month- Setting the year
DST (SUMMER TIME)- Activation/deactivation of summer time
MODE 12/24- Selecting the clock mode on 12 or 24
hours
RADIO
- Activation/deactivation of the following
items on the display:frequency or RDS message of the radio
station selected, compact disc and corresponding track selected, cassette function on

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TELEPHONE- Activation/deactivation of the following
items on the display: incoming or outgoing phone call with name and/or
number of the subscriber connected
NAVIGATION- Activation/deactivation of the displays
and information concerning the route tobe followed
LANGUAGE- Setting the language of the messages
shown on the display

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

UNITS- Selection of the following units of measure: km, mi, °C, °F, km/l, l/100km,
mpg
BUZZER- Buzzer volume adjustment
SERVICE- Display of information concerning correct
vehicle maintenance, strictly connectedwith the Scheduled Maintenance Programme
MENU OFF- Exits the menu.

53

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 69-70)
To use the information the reconfigurable multifunction display is able to give (with the ignition key at MAR) you should firstly familiarise
with the control buttons (on the plate at the side of the steering column and on the top of the right lever) using them as described below. Before doing anything you are also advised to read this chapter in full.

A0A0022m

To scroll the display and the related options, upwards or to increase the value
displayed depending on the case
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated with Q in the following diagrams, to confirm the choice required and/or move to the next screen or access the Menu
Press for more than 2 seconds indicated with R in the following diagrams,
to confirm the choice required and return to the standard screen
To scroll the display and the related options, down wards or decrease the value
displayed according to the casefig. 69
A0A0021m

Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated with T in the following diagrams to move to the next screen
Press for more than 4 seconds indicated with U in the following diagrams, toreset and then start a new journeyfig. 70

54

IMPORTANT Buttons â andãactivate different functions depending on the following
situations:- When the standard screen is activated, they allow adjustment of the inner lighting- Within the menu they allow scrolling up or down
- They make it possible to increase or decrease during setting operations.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”, which can be selected through the â and ã buttons for accessto the different select operations and settings (see examples “LANGUAGE” and “DATE” below); for further details, also refer to “Access to themenu screen” in the previous chapter.
Français
Español

Nederlands

EnglishItaliano

MENU OFFSPEEDSERVICE

DeutschBUZZERQ

TRIP B

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU

UNITS
TIME

LANGUAGE
DATE
DST (SUMMER TIME)Q

NAVIGATION
MODE 12/24
TELEPHONE

Day

RADIO
Year

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Month

55

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INITIAL CHECK
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the reconfigurable multifunction display shows the message CHECK ACTIVE: the diagnostic phase of all theelectronic systems on the car has started, this lasts for about 4 seconds. If no faults are detected when the engine has started, the display shows
the OK message.
IMPORTANT If the reconfigurable multifunction display shows a failure message, see the details given in the “Warning lights” chapter.

If the display shows a failure message, see the details given in the“Warning lights” chapter; if there are two or more failures, the display
shows them in cycle, one after the other. To eliminate the display of themessage and/or of the warning light repeated on the rev counterby the reconfigurable multifunction display, press button Q.

Is theenginestarted?

If nofailuresarepresent

YES

NO

The Programmed Maintenance
Schedule includes vehicle
maintenance every 20,000
km; this is shown
automatically, with the ignition
key at MAR, starting from
2,000 km (or miles) from thisdeadline and it is shown again
every 200 km.

Standard screen

56

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

After the INITIAL CHECK, with the car stationary and with the standard screen, it is possible to access the menu screen: press Q.

To navigate use the â andã buttons.

Setting the limit speed is also possible with the car on the move.
If the waiting time (no operation) is above 10 seconds, the standard screen or the screen that was active before pressing the Q button
is restored automatically; all the operations confirmed are stored.

See
INITIAL CHECKQ

Is the carmoving?

YES

See next page
to enter speed limit.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ACCESS TO MENU SCREEN

NO

SPEED
TRIP BTIMEDATEDST (SUMMER TIME)
MODE 12/24
RADIO
TELEPHONE
NAVIGATIONLANGUAGEUNITS
BUZZERSERVICEMENU OFF57

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SPEED
Wit this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer to alert the driver. To set the
speed limit, proceed as follows:
Returnto standard screen

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screenQâãThis screen is shown
automatically on thedisplay, together withthe sounding of abuzzer, as soon as the
car exceeds the set
speed limit.

Choose activation or
deactivation (ON/OFF)Q
R

Q

Use the â and/or ãbuttons to set the speed required. During the settingâ operation the value flashes on the screen. Every press of the button increases
decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increase Rã oror decrease.
When you are near the required setting release the button and complete
adjustment with single presses. The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h
or between 20 and 160 mph depending on the unit set previously(see UNITS paragraph described later).

58

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Return to menu screenWith this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B,
AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B, and TRAVEL DISTANCE B during a “partial mission” contained in the “general mission. For further information see“General Trip - Trip B”.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

R

â
ã

Q

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TRIP B (ON/OFF)

Returnto standard screen

Menu screen

R

â
ã

Q
Using theâ or ã buttons
choose activation or
deactivation ON/OFF

Return to menu screen

59

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TIME
To adjust the clock (hours - minutes) proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screenQâãEach press on the â or ã
button increases or decreases
by one unit. Keeping thecorresponding button pressed
obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near
the required value, release thecontrol and complete adjustment
with single presses.

Returnto standard screen

R
Q

â
ã

Q
Return to menu screen

60

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engineRTo correct the date (day - month - year) proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

R

â
ã

Q

Returnto standard screen

Menu screen

â
ã

R
Q
â
ã

Each press
on the â or ã button increases
or decreases by
one unit. Keeping thecorresponding
button pressed obtains automatic
fast increase or decrease. When
you are near the required value,
release thecontrol and complete adjustment
with single presses.

R
Q
â
ã

R
Q
Return to menu screen

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DATE

61

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DST (SUMMER TIME)
To activate/deactivate the summer time function (which corresponds to + 1 hour in relation to the daylight time), proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO MENU SCREEN

R

â
ã

Q

Returnto standard screen

Menu screen

â
ã

R
Q
Return to menu screen

Selecting and activating the
DST ON function,
the display switches fromdaylight time to summer timeand vice versa, with no needto intervene manuallyon the TIME function described
previously.

62

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This function is used to set the clock in the 12 hour or 24 hour mode. To adjust, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

Returnto standard screenâã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MODE 12/24

R
Q
Return to menu screen

63

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIOIn the RADIO DISPLAY ON condition, when the radio is turned on, the display repeats the display on the front panel of the radio itself. To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

Returnto standard screen

â
ã

R
Q
Return to menu screen

64

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In the TELEPHONE DISPLAY ON condition, when a phone call arrives, the display shows (if listed) the name and phone number of the caller.
To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TELEPHONE

Returnto standard screen

â
ã

R
Q
Return to menu screen

65

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

NAVIGATIONIn the NAVIGATION DISPLAY ON condition, during use of the radionavigator, the display repeats the display (pictograms) on the radionavigator display itself. To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

Returnto standard screen

â
ã

R
Q
Return to menu screen

66

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To select the language required for the texts and messages shown on the display, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

Returnto standard screenâã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LANGUAGE

R
Q
Return to menu screen

67

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UNITSThe display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units required, proceed as follows:
WARNINGThe units of temperature (°C or °F) set on themultifunction display are also shown on the displaysof the two-zone climate control and navigator.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN

Returnto standard screenRâãMenu screen

Q

R
â
ã

â
ã

R

Q
â
ã

R

R

Q

â
ã

Q

Q

â
ã

Q

R
â
ã

Q

R
Return to menu screen

68

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The buzzer that accompanies the controls in the car and any failure signals, can be adjusted to a pre-defined scale using theâ and/or ã
buttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENRâã
Menu screen

Q

Returnto standard screenâã

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

BUZZER

R
Q
Return to menu screen

WARNINGIn the buzzer OFF condition
any buzzer failure warnings
are maintained.

69

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARSERVICEWith the SERVICE function it is possible toreceive information connected with correct
vehicle maintenance. To consult this function, proceed as follows:

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâãQ
Menu screen

WARNING
The programmed Maintenance Schedule includes vehicle maintenance every
20,000 km; this is shown
automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, starting from 2,000 km (or miles) from this deadline andit is shown again every 200 km. This display can only be reset by Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.

â

â

â

ã

ã

ã

â

â

â

ã

ã

ã

â

Q

R

Return to menu screen

Returnto standard screenã70

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MENU OFFThis is the last function that closes the circular setting cycle listed in the initial menu screen.

See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREENâãQ
Menu screen

Returnto standard screen

71

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B
The TRIP COMPUTER function enables displaying on the re-configurable multifunction display the engine oil temperature and the sizes relevant to the car operating conditions. This function comprises the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in the graph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.
The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, RANGE, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVEL TIME (driving time),
TRAVEL DISTANCE.
TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B (driving time), TRAVEL DISTANCE B.
Start of journey procedure (reset)
To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button with U (see “Control buttons”).
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP

End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP˙˙

GENERAL TRIP
Reset TRIP B

TRIP B˙

TRIP B˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

˙˙

Reset TRIP B

˙

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

˙

TRIP BEnd of partial mission
Start of new partial mission

End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B

The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to reset
TRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only the
information associated with this function.

72

IMPORTANT The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Standard screen

T

T

T

T

T

T

U

U
U

Reset GENERAL TRIP
and TRIP B

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

T
U

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Continues
on next page

See
INITIAL CHECK

T
U

U

73

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Returnto standard screen
Continued fromprevious page

TRIP B ON?

NO

YES

T

T

T
U

U
U Reset TRIP B
WARNING Pressing the P button returns
automatically to the standard screen.

74

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

T
U

UWith this function it is possible to adjust the lighting (dimming/brightening) of the instrument cluster, mileage recorder (total, trip meter),headlamp aiming display, radio display, radio navigator display and two-zone climate control.
Partial lighting
Keeping the ã button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds the instrument cluster lighting isturned off with the exception of the speedometer.
Keeping the â button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds the complete instrument cluster
lighting is turned on again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DIMMER

Standard screen
See
INITIAL CHECK

â
ã

â
ã

Q

WARNING
When the outer lights are switched on dimming of the brightness canbe perceived. In the event of any faults, lighting adjustment (rheostat)is not possible and the display is shown at its maximum brightness.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

R

Returnto standard screen

75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARDISPLAYS IN CONCURRENCE WITH THE EVENT

A0A0429m

Display with the ignition key removed opening
or closing a door.
The reconfigurable multifunction display
together with the mileage recorder display(total and trip) is timed, after 10 seconds itgoes off automatically.

Standard screen:
when the radio isturned on in the
RADIO DISPLAY ON
condition.

fig. 71

Standard screen:
when a phone call isreceived in the TELEPHONEDISPLAY ON condition.

In the event of a failure
see the “Warning lights”
chapter.

The displays illustrated are purely
indicative.

76

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Standard screen:
during assisted
navigation in the
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
ON condition.

IMPORTANT The presence of warning lights depends on the type of equipment with which the car is fitted.
Warning
light on dialx

Messageon display

LOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off after
approx. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, due to a possible leak in the circuit and when the handbrake is engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING LIGHTSWARNING
If the x warning light turns on when travelling check that the handbrake is not engaged. If the warning light stays on together with themessage + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display with the handbrake off, stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

u

HIGH ENGINE COOLANT FLUID TEMPERATURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off after
approx. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, when the engine is overheated. If it turns on when travelling, stop the car leaving theengine on and slightly accelerated to further activate the circulation of the coolant fluid.
If the warning light does not go off within the next 2 or 3 minutes, stop the engine and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

77

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial¬

Messageon display

AIR BAG FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off after
approx. 4 seconds The warning light stays on glowing steadily if there is an operating failure in the
Air bag system.

WARNING

If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition key
to MAR or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure insafety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could
not trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the system checked immediately.
WARNING

The failure of the ¬ warning light (warning light off) is also indicated by the flashing for more than the normal 4 seconds of the passenger’s front air bag deactivated warning light.

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSUREWARNING

If the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when travelling, stop the engine immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

78

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Messageon display

LOW BATTERY CHARGE
If the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when the engine
is running, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services immediately.

<

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the dial turns on glowing steadily when, with the ignition key turned to MAR,the driver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSINGThe message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when one or bothdoors or the tailgate are not properly shut.

79

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

Messageon display

BRAKE PAD WEAR
The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when the front brakepads are worn; in this case have them changed as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when changing them,also check the rear brake pads.

SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILURE
The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault to Selespeed gearbox is detected.

WARNINGIf warning light t and the message appear on the display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to have the fault eliminated.

80

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

U

Messageon display

EOBD ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light turns on, but it should
go off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling together with the message + symbol on
the reconfigurable multifunction display:
glowing steadily - means a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause high emissions at the exhaust, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.
In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

The warning light goes off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;
flashing - indicates the possibility of damage to catalyst (see “EOBD system” in this chapter).
If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed ofthe engine until the warning light stops flashing; continue the journey at moderate speed, trying to
avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

If, turning the ignition key to MAR, the U warning light does notturn on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

81

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

Messageon display

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
If with the engine running, the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction
display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services immediately.

If with the engine running, the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction
display, this means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo
CODE system” in this chapter). Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have all the keys memorised.

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The message + symbol on the display are shown when the inertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered.

WARNINGIf after the display of the message the smell of fuel or leaks from the
supply system are noted,do not re-engage the switch to avoid therisk of fire.

82

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

>

x
+

>

Messageon display

INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial lights up, but it should go off after
approx. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, when the system is inefficient. In this case the braking system keeps its effectivenessunchanged, but without the potential offered by the ABS system. Caution is advisable, particularly
in all cases of less than perfect grip. It is therefore necessary to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dialWARNING
The car is fitted with electronic braking distributor (EBD). The turningon at the same time of the x and > warning lights on the dial together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, withthe engine running indicates an EBD system failure; in this case heavy braking
may cause the rear wheels to lock before time, with the possibility of skidding.
Drive extremely carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service to havethe system checked.

WARNING
The turning on only of the > warning light on the dial together withthe message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, withthe engine running normally indicates a failure of the ABS system only. In thiscase the braking system maintains its effectiveness, without however the antilock function. In these conditions, the effectiveness of the EBD may also be reduced, In this case too, you are recommended to contact the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service immediately, driving in such a way as to avoid sharp braking, to have the system checked.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

83

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dialF

Messageon display

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED
With the passenger’s front Air bag engaged, turning the ignition key to MAR the warning lightturns on, but should go off after 4 seconds.

WARNING

Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This isindicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning lightF . In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint
system failures, if any. Stop the car and ontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked
The warning light turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated.

á

VDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL)
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on and it should go off after
approx. 4 seconds.
If the warning light does not go out or stays on when travelling together with the message +symbol shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates the cutting in of the VDC system.

84

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Messageon display

LIGHT FAILURE
The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault to any
one of the following lights is detected:- sidelights- braking lights and corresponding fuse- rear fog guards- number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse ora cut-off electric connection.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

85

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

K

Messageon display

FUEL RESERVE
The warning light on the dial turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable
multifunction display, when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank and when autonomy is below
50 km.

AUTONOMY (TRIP COMPUTER)The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when autonomy isbelow 50 km.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDEDThe warning light turns on together with the message on the display and the sounding of a buzzer
when the car speed exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Reconfigurable multifunction display” chapter).

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display 2000 km from the deadline given in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed intervals, turning the ignition key to MAR every 200 km.

86

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

R
E
3

Ü

Messageon display

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards
or, together with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAMS
The warning light on the dial turns on when the sidelights or dipped beams are turned on.

CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL)
The warning light on the instrument panel turns on when the constant speed adjustment ring nut(Cruise Control) is turned to the ON position.

87

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Warning
light on dial

1

Messageon display

MAIN BEAMS
The warning light on the dial turns on when the main beams are turned on or when the “Follow
me home” device is turned on (see corresponding chapter).
WARNING LIGHT FAILURE
This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault is detected to one of thewarning lights indicated.

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD
The symbol √ + message are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display and the buzzer
sounds, when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the driver of the possible presence of ice on the road.

88

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0430m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 72
1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demisting side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet area
fixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

89

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

UPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 73)

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLETS
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 74)

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 75)

The vent (1) has an opening/closing control (A).

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):To adjust the air flow, use control (C):II = Completely open.

II = Completely open.

closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

CENTRE SWIVEL VENTSADJUSTMENT (fig. 73)
Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).

closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

A0A0085m

90

fig. 73

A0A0086m

fig. 74

fig. 75

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0087m

A0A0203m

To start the system (fig. 76):- turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side - passenger’sside).
- press the AUTO button.
IMPORTANT The climate control system makes it possible to personalise thetemperatures required on the two sides witha maximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s side and the passenger’s side.
IMPORTANT The climate control compressor only works with the engine runningand an outside temperature above 4°C.

WARNING
With an outside temperature below 4°C the climate
control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore unadvisable
to use the inside air re-circulation
feature v with a low outside
temperature as the windows might
mist over quickly.

fig. 76
For further details about the system andhow to make the best use of it, read the
instructions given in the pages that follow.

The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of other fluids which are incompatible
with the system components.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL
The car is fitted with a two-zone climate
control system, controlled by an electronic
control unit which makes it possible to separately adjust the air temperature on the driver’s side and on the passenger’s side. To
obtain optimum temperature control in the
two areas of the passenger compartment,
the system has an outside sensor, a passenger compartment sensor and a two-zone
sun ray sensor.

91

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

On some versions the system is integrated with an incipient misting sensor installedbehind the inside rear-view mirror, capableof “controlling” a predefined area of thewindscreen inner surface which can automatically act on the system to prevent or reduce misting through a series of operations
such as: opening air re-circulation, enabling
the compressor, air flow to the windscreen,
fan speed sufficient for demisting; in thecase of heavy misting, enabling the MAXDEF function.
To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting sensor, stickers mustnot be applied (road licence holder,time card etc.) in the “control”
area between the sensor and thewindscreen. Care should also begiven to cleaning the windscreen
and the actual sensor, avoiding theaccumulation of dust and other substances.

IMPORTANT The demisting procedure
is enabled each time the ignition key isturned to MAR or pressing the AUTO button. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the following
buttons: compressor, air re-circulation, airflow, air capacity. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until the AUTO button is pressed again or the next timethe ignition key is turned to MAR.
On certain versions, the system is integrated by an antipollution sensor capable ofautomatically switching on inside air re-circulation to lessen the harmful effects of polluted air in cities, queues, tunnels and operation of the windscreen washer (with thetypical smell of spirits).
IMPORTANT The function of the antipollution sensor is subordinate to safety
conditions; therefore disabling the climate
control compressor or at an outside temperature below 4°C the sensor is disabled.
The sensor can be re-enabled pressing there-circulation button v until taking it to
the automatic mode.

It is possible to change the setting of thefollowing functions manually:– fan speed– air distribution– inside air re-circulation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable.
The control of functions not changed manually remains automatic and in any case thetemperature of the air admitted to the passenger compartment is controlled automatically according to the temperatures set on
the driver’s and passenger’s displays.
IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storage
until the user decides to resume automatic
control. The settings selected manually are
stored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time it is started.

92

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Air quality control is also entrusted to a
combined particle and activated carbon filter. The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parameters and functions:– temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)– fan speed– air distribution– inside air re-circulation on/off– climate control compressor on/off enable.

A0A0090m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLS (fig. 77)
1 - Inside temperature set display (driver’sside)
2 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
3 - Fan speed set and system off display(OFF)
4 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off
5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)
7 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front side
windows, rearscreen heating and wing mirror coils (MAX-DEF function -)8 - Inside air re-circulation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on/off button (10 - Air distribution selection buttons
11 - Inside air temperature sensor

fig. 77
12 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO

14 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √13 - Button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO

93

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM (fig. 77)
IMPORTANT The knob rings do nothave a mechanical stopper therefore, oncethe maximum or minimum value has beenreached, they are free to turn in both directions.
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is advisable to set the temperatures required on the displays, then pressthe (13) AUTO button.
This way the system will start working
completely automatically to reach the temperatures set as quickly as possible and thenmaintain them.
During completely automatic system operation, the temperatures set can bechanged at any time: the system will automatically change its settings to adjust to the
new requirements.

IMPORTANT To be able to be accepted by the system, the difference in temperature between the driver’s and passengers side must be within a range of 7°C.
It is possible to personalise the choices
made automatically by the system intervening manually on the following controls:– fan speed adjustment knob (4)– air distribution selection buttons (10)– inside air re-circulation on/off button(8) v– climate control on enable button (14)√.

Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the button (13) AUTO.

94

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

With one or more functions engaged manually, the adjustment of the temperature of
the air admitted to the passenger compartment continues to be controlled automatically by the system (left led on button 13
AUTO on) except with the climate control
compressor off.
In fact, in this condition, the air admited
to the passenger compartment cannot havea lower temperature than the outside air;
this condition is indicated by the turning offof the two leds on button (13) AUTO andflashing on the display (1) and/or (5) related with the temperature rate that cannot be obtained.

A0A0204m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 78)
Turning the rings of knobs (2 or 6), clockwise or counter-clockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of the air required respectively in the left zone (knob 2)
or right zone (knob 6) of the passenger
compartment. The temperatures set are
shown on the displays (1) and (5) above
the knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures set
is restored automatically using knob (6).
Turning the knob rings clockwise orcounter-clockwise until they reach the extreme selections HI or LO, the maximum
heating or cooling functions are respectively engaged:

fig. 78

95

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0218m

HI function(highest heating power - fig. 79)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature above 32.5°C, and can be activated independently from the driver’s orpassenger’s side or both; this setting brings
the system to the “monozone” mode andis shown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when requiring to heat the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, exploiting the maximum potential of the system.
This function uses the maximum temperature of the coolant fluid, while air distribution and fan speed are controlled according
to the system settings.
This function is unadvisable withthe engine cold to prevent admitting air that is not warm enough tothe passenger compartment.

fig. 79
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 32.5°C and returns
to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the system off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature
set to a value below 32.5°C; the opposite
display will show 32.5°C.

96

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0219m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 80)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature below 16.5°C; this setting isshown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when requiring to cool the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, exploiting the maximum potential of the system.
The function cuts off air heating, engages
inside air re-circulation (to prevent admitting
hot air to the passenger compartment) andthe climate control compressor, takes air distribution to R E and the fan speed as set by
the system.

fig. 80

All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the function off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperature
set on a value above 16.5°C; the opposite
display will show 16.5°C.
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 16.5°C and returns
to an operating condition with automatic
temperature adjustment.

97

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0207m

MONO BUTTON FOR
ALIGNMENT OF THE
TEMPERATURES SET (fig. 81)
Pressing button (12) MONO automaticallyaligns the the temperature on the passenger’s side with that on the driver’s side,
therefore it is possible to set the same temperature between the two zones simply turning the ring of knob (2) on the driver’s side.
This function is provided to simplify temperature adjustment of the whole passenger compartment when only the driver is on
board.

fig. 81

Separate operation of the temperatures set
is automatically restored when the passenger uses the ring on knob (6) or presses
button (12) MONO.

98

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

fig. 82

A0A0206m

IMPORTANT Pressing the inside air recirculation button (8) vit is possible toobtain the inlet of untreated outside air tothe passenger compartment.

fig. 83

To turn the system on again, simply turnthe ring of knob (4) clockwise, or press any
one button, except the inside air re-circula-tion (8) and rearscreen heating (9) buttons; this operation restores all the operating
conditions stored previously.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0205m

FAN SPEEDADJUSTMENT KNOB
(fig. 82-83)
Turning the ring of knob (4), clockwise
or counter-clockwise, increases or decreases the speed of the fan, thus the amountof air admitted to the passenger compartment; the 16 selectable speeds are shown
on a bar (in steps of 3) up to a maximumof 6 bars lit:
- maximum fan speed = all bars lit;
- minimum fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button (14) √. To
restore automatic fan speed control, after amanual adjustment, press button (13)
AUTO. Completely turning the ring of knob
(4) counter-clockwise switches the systemoff, with the following situation: display (1)off; display (5) off; centre display (3) with
lit display OFF and left led on inside air re-circulation button (8) v on.

IMPORTANT On leaving the OFF condition, inside air re-circulation v returns tothe condition prior to switching off.

99

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0208m

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
BUTTONS (fig. 84)
Pressing one or more buttons (10) it ispossible to manually choose one of the 5possible air distributions to the passenger
compartment:
R E Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlet.
R E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and side
outlets and the rear outlet (coolestair). This air flow distribution is particularly useful in spring and autumn,when the sun is shining.
Z

Air flow towards the front and rear
lower parts of the passenger compartment. Due to the natural tendency of heat to spread upwards, thistype of distribution allows heating of
the passenger compartment in the
shortest time, also giving a prompt
feeling of warmth to the coldest partsof the body.

fig. 84
Q
Z

Splitting of the air flow between thewindscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part of the vehicle. This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heatingof the passenger compartment while
preventing possible misting of the windows.

Q

Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.

100

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT Pressing one of these buttons turns on (led on button itself on) or off(led on button off) the associated function
if the combination chosen is among the 5possible ones, if not it only activates themain function of the button pressed, without the possibility of turning off with anotherpress (at least in one distribution the air flow
should be spread in the passenger compartment).
To restore automatic air distribution control
after a manual selection, press button (13)
AUTO.

√

Pressing button (14) √ enables the turning on of the climate control compressor.
This condition is shown by the lighting up of
the led on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (13) AUTO
and (14) √ go off; automatic inside air recirculation control is also excluded (both leds
off on button 8 v) which always stays
off to prevent misting the windows; even
if unadvisable, it is still possible to restore
automatic operation of inside air re-circulation pressing button (8) v.
With the climate control compressor off, it
is not possible to admit air to the passenger
compartment with a temperature below
the outside temperature; in this case, thevalue flashes on the display concerning thetemperature that cannot be reached and theleft led on button (13 AUTO - fig. 86)
goes off.
The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restore automatic control for switching on the climate
control compressor, press button (14) √again, the led on the button turns on, orfig. 85

A0A0211m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0210m

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF ENABLE
BUTTON(fig. 85)

fig. 86press button (13) AUTO; in which case,however, the other manual settings set will
be cancelled.

101

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0212m

WARNING
Operation of the climate control compressor is necessary
for cooling and dehumidifying the air;
it is advisable to keep this function
always on, to prevent window misting problems.

INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 87)

fig. 87

Inside air re-circulation is controlled according to three operating logics- automatic control, indicated by the turning on of the right led on the button;- forced engagement (inside air re-circulation always on), indicated by the turning onof the left led on the button (and by the rightled going off at the same time);- forced switching off (inside air re-circulation always off with air inlet from outside),
indicated by the turning off of both leds.
These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the inside air re-circulation button (8) v.

102

When inside air re-circulation is controlled
automatically by the system, the right led

on the air re-circulation button (8) v
stays on all the time and the left led shows
the air re-circulation condition:
on = air re-circulation operating;off = air re-circulation off.
If inside air re-circulation has been turnedon or off manually, the led on button (13)
AUTO turns off.
In automatic operation, inside air re-circulation is turned on automatically when the antipollution sensor detects the presence of polluted air, for example in cities, queues, tunnels and operation of the windscreen washer (with the characteristic smell of spirit).

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
With the outside temperature below 4°C the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore unadvisable to use the inside air re-circulation feature v with low outside temperature as the windows
may quickly mist over.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0209m

WARNING
The inside air re-circulation
system makes it possible
to reach the required “heating” or“cooling” conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.
fig. 88

WARNING
It is advisable to turn on
the inside air re-circulation
system in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoided, especially with several persons
on board, to avoid the possibility of
the windows misting inside.

WARNING
In certain weather conditions (e.g.: outside temperature around 0°C) and with automatic air re-circulation control on,
mist may form on the windows. In
this case press the inside air re-circulation button (8) v, to switch
off re-circulation (leds on buttonoff) and if necessary increase theflow of air to the windscreen.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION AUTO
BUTTON (fig. 88)
Pressing the (13) AUTO button the system automatically adjusts the amount anddistribution of the air admitted to the passenger compartment, cancelling all the previous manual adjustments.
This condition is indicated by the lighting
up of both leds on the button itself.
When the right led, on button (13) AUTO, is off, this means that one or more manual operations have been carried out andtherefore automatic control is not complete(except temperature control which is always
automatic) indicated by the left led on, orthat the system is in the OFF condition.

103

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0213m

QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
BUTTON(- MAX-DEF function) (fig. 89)

Pressing button (7) - the climate control automatically activates timed operationof all the functions needed to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen andfront side windows, i.e.:- it turns on the climate control compressor;- switches off inside air re-circulation, if on(both leds off);- sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (1) and (5);- operates the fan at a predefined speed;- directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;- turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting
feature is on, the led on button (7) -, theled on the rearscreen heating button (9)( and the led on button (14) √ turn on;
at the same time the leds on button (8)v go off.

fig. 89
IMPORTANT If the engine is not warm
enough, the function will not engage thepredefined fan speed immediately, to limit
the flow to the passenger compartment of
air that is not warm enough to demist thewindows.
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the only manual operations possible are manual adjustment of the
fan and switching rearscreen heating off.

104

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pressing one of the following buttons
again: (7) -, (8) v, (12) MONO,(13) AUTO or (14) √ the system switches off the maximum demisting/defrosting
function, restoring the operating conditionsof the system prior to turning it on, in addition to activating the last function required,
if any.

A0A0214m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

WING MIRROR
AND REARSCREENDEFROSTING/DEMISTING
BUTTON(fig. 90)(

Pressing button (9) ( turns on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The turning on of this function is shown by
the turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.
IMPORTANT The system turns onrearscreen heating automatically if the temperature is below 3°C.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.

fig. 90
POLLEN FILTER
The filter has the specific capability of combining the mechanical filtering of the air with
an electrostatic effect so that the outside air
admitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free of particles such as dust,
pollen, etc.
In addition to the above, it also effectively reduces the concentration of pullutants.
The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.

Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services at least
once a year, preferably at the onset of summer.
If the vehicle is used mainly in dusty or polluted areas it should be checked and if necessary replaced, at shorter intervals.

The failure to replace thefilter may considerably reduce the effectiveness ofthe climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the outlets and vents.

105

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARCONTROLSHAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 91)

TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 91)

These are switched on by pressing button(C), on the centre console panel, regardlessof the position of the ignition key.

Electric tailgate release is only allowed with
the ignition key in the ignition switch at
MAR vehicle stationary, at STOP or
PARK for 3 minutes without opening/closing a door. To release the tailgate, press button (A) on the centre console panel.

When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the switch itself begins to flash
together with the direction indicators andthe direction indicator warning lights on the
instrument cluster. This function is switched
off by pressing the button again.

FOG LIGHTS (fig. 91)
These are turned on pressing button (B)on the centre console panel, when the outer lights are already on, at the same time
the led on the button itself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the fog
lights are turned off automatically and do
not come on the next time the engine isstarted without pressing button (B).
Press button (B) again to switch off.
IMPORTANT The front foglights should
be used in compliance with local traffic laws.

WARNING
Use the hazard warning
lights in compliance withlocal regulations.
A0A0091m

106 fig. 91

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlights or fog lights on, pressing button(D) on the centre console panel, at thesame time the warning light on the button
itself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the fog
guards are automatically turned off and they
do not come on the next time the engine
is started unless button (D) is pressed. Toturn them off press button (D).

INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 92)
This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s door
pillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.

WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.

The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.
If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system again.

IMPORTANT Always use the rear fog
guards in compliance with local regulations.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARREAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 91)

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM(fig. 91)
To lock the doors simultaneously, press button (E) on the centre console panel, regardless of the position of the ignition key.
The deterrent led turns on as follows:

A0A0318m– with the ignition key at MAR glowing
steadily with a yellow light.
– with the ignition key at STOP flashing with a red light (deterrence condition).

107

fig. 92

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE(fig. 93) (excluding versions
with Xenon headlights)
The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the vehicle load.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), on
the plate at the side of the steering column:– press the arrow on the button (A), toincrease by one position (eg.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2➟ 3);– press the arrow on the button (S), tolower by one position (eg.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1➟ 0).

A0A0467m

The display (B), in the tachometer shows
the positions during adjustment.
For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:– position 0: one or two people occupying the front seats– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– position 3: driver + maximum permissible load all stowed in luggage compartment

The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.
To operate the brake when the vehicle isstationary, pull lever (A) upwards, until therequired braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is at MAR thewarning light on the instrument cluster x
will come on.

WARNING
The wheels should belocked after a few clicks ofthe hand brake. If this does not occur contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
services to have the hand brakeadjusted.

A0A0490m

WARNING
Adjust the beams every time
the load carried changes.

108 fig. 93

fig. 94

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

HAND BRAKE (fig. 94)

GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 95)– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);The position of the single gears is shownby the pictogram on the gearshift leverknob.

– keeping the button pressed lower thelever, the warning light x on the instrument cluster will go out.
To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the hand brake.
IMPORTANT The hand brake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, withthe lever pulled, button (B) is pressed.
Therefore, to release the brake, in addition
to pressing button (B) it is also necessary
to pull lever (A) further upwards to release
the safety device, then lower the lever completely.

When shifting gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.
For versions fitted with six speed gearbox,
to engage reverse gear (R), raise the ringunder the grip (with the fingers of the same
hand holding the lever).
After engaging reverse gear, release thering. It is not necessary to raise the ring on
the lever when shifting from reverse to another gear.

IMPORTANT On certain versions abuzzer sounds to alert the driver if the car
is moved with the hand brake engaged.

WARNINGTo change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, there
should be no obstacles on the floor
under the pedal unit: make surethat any mats are well laid and do
not interfere with the pedals.

A0A0410m

109

fig. 95

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT Reverse gear may only beengaged with the car completely at a standstill. With the engine running, before engaging reverse gear it is necessary to wait
for at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal
fully depressed to prevent clashing and thepossibility of damaging the gears.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To release the hand brake:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SELESPEED
TRANSMISSION
The car may be fitted with a mechanicaltransmission with electronic control called“Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies useof the car, reducing the fatigue of city driving or when frequent gearshifting is required, at the same time offering brilliant
performance.
IMPORTANT To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from thestart.

This device comprises a conventional mechanical gearbox to which an electronically-operated electrohydraulic device has been
added which automatically controls the
clutch and gear engagement.

There are also two stalks on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 97) through which, only with the car on the move (with speed
above 2 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.

The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accelerator pedal.

The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:

Gearshifting takes place through the control lever (A-fig. 96) which is of the floating type with a “single central stable position”.

– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),
in which the driver directly requests gearshifting through the lever on the centre console
or pressing the buttons at the steering
wheel;

Using the lever it is possible to request an
increase/decrease of the gear ratio engaged
and/or reverse gear engagement (R) or
neutral (N).

– the second is automatic, called CITY,
in which the system decides directly whento shift gear (mode selectable with the specific button A-fig. 98).

A0A0097m

110 fig. 96

A0A0098m

fig. 98

fig. 97

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0096m

Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are signalled to the driver through a warning light(t) connected with the associated failure message (fig. 100) and accompanied
by an acoustic signal.

The gear engaged (fig. 99) is always signalled on the display regardless of the selected mode.
N = neutral;

SYSTEM ACTIVATIONIMPORTANT When the driver’s door is
opened the Selespeed starts the hydraulicpart of the system to prepare it for when theengine is started. This function (noted by
the turning of the electric pump) is deactivated after 10 door openings/closings notfollowed by actual system activation turning
the ignition key.
Turning the ignition switch to MAR, after about one second, the reconfigurable
multifunction display shows the gear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R); from thismoment onwards, the Selespeed system accepts gearshift commands.

1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
6 = sixth gear
R = reverse.

A0A9017g

fig. 99

A0A9081g

IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the reconfigurable display does not show the gear
engaged or the warning light t (together with the message shown by the display)stays on, turn the ignition key to STOP and
wait for the display to turn off, then repeat
system switch on. If the fault persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

111

fig. 100

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshifting, both using the gear lever and the steering wheel controls. The gearbox remains in
the CITY mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION WITH
ENGINE OFF
IMPORTANT Before using the gearshift
control lever, always check the gear engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
R).
With the vehicle stopped and the brake
pedal pressed, requests to change gear are
accepted only through the control lever on
the centre console.
To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed:– to shift upwards (+) (fig. 101) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
it shifts to second, if in second it shifts tothird and so on up to fifth). If the system
is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) moving thelever forwards causes the engagement of
first gear (1).

– to shift downwards (–) (fig. 101)
push the lever backwards (if the car is in
fifth gear it shifts to fourth, if in fourth it
shifts to third and so on down to first gear).
To allow setting the transmission to neutral (N), starting from the condition withthe vehicle stationary and brake pedal
pressed, move the gearshift lever to the right(fig. 102). The neutral control (N) is accepted with car speed below 60 km/h.
From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) andwith the car practically stationary, it is possible to request the engagement of reversegear pushing the lever to the right and thenbackwards (fig. 103). If the car is moving,
the request is not accepted. Wait for the car
to stop and then request gear engagement
again.

A0A0101m

112 fig. 101

IMPORTANT When parking the vehicle
on a sloping road and engaging a gear tokeep it braked, always check that the reconfigurable multifunction display shows the
new gear engaged and wait for one or two
seconds before releasing the brake pedal toallow complete engagement of the clutch.

A0A0102m

fig. 102

A0A0103m

fig. 103

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately release the gearshift control lever after making the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) causes the systemswitches automatically to CITY.

The engine can be started either with agear engaged or in neutral (N) provided
that the brake pedal is fully depressed.
IMPORTANT If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the starter motor will not turn,thus preventing the engine from being started.
After starting, the gearbox sets to neutral
automatically, the reconfigurable multifunction display shows the letter (N) and thesystem selects the semiautomatic operating
mode (manual).

WARNING
If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, thedriver is informed of the potentially dangerous situation due to thefact that the gearbox is in neutral
by the buzzer and by the reconfigurable multifunction display.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine turns off but the Selespeed system isstill active waiting for the car to stop completely. After about 2 - 4 seconds from when
the key has been moved to STOP, the hydraulic part is deactivated and the reconfigurable multifunction display is turned off immediately afterwards; at this point is the Selespeed system deactivated.
The gear selected before switching off theengine remains engaged.
If the engine is stopped with the gearbox
in neutral (N), the buzzer calls the driver’s
attention so that the car can be put in safety conditions engaging first gear (1) or reverse (R). In this case, the ignition key
should be turned to MAR and with thebrake pedal pressed, engage first gear (1)or reverse (R).
IMPORTANT If the engine is stopped
with the CITY mode engaged, this will be
stored by the system. Indeed, the next timethe engine is started, this condition will stillbe active.

IMPORTANT Should the engine go off
with the car on the move, the next time itis started the Alfa Romeo CODE warning
light (Y) may come on. In this case checkthat the warning light goes off turning theengine off and on again with the vehicle stationary. If not contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

WARNING
NEVER leave the car withthe gears in neutral (N).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

STARTING THE ENGINEWARNING
Never remove the ignition
key when the car is moving. In addition to the fact that theSelespeed system would not work
properly up to stopping the car, thesteering wheel would lock automatically the first time it is turned.

113

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine andthen turn off the Selespeed system
keeping the brake pedal pressed:
ONLY release the pedal when thereconfigurable multifunction display
on the cluster has gone out.

MOVING THE CAR
With the engine on and the car stationary,
the gears that can be engaged for moving
off are only first (1), second (2) and/or
reverse (R).
To shift gears, keep the brake pedal
pressed and use only the lever on the centre console since the stalks on the steering
wheel can be only operated if the car speed
exceeds 10 km/h.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can be
engaged from any of the following other ratios: neutral (N), first (1) or second (2).
If the car is moving, the request is not accepted, it is necessary to wait for the car
to stop completely and request the engagement of reverse again (R).
The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the reconfigurable
multifunction display on the instrument cluster and by the intermittent sound of abuzzer.
IMPORTANT If when shifting from reverse (R) ➞ first (1) or neutral (N) ➞ first(1) sticking occurs on first gear, the system
automatically engages second gear (2).
This is not to be considered as a fault as itis part of the operating logic. For the same
reason, in the case of sticking on reverse
gear, the system partially closes the clutch
to allowgear engagement; in this case theengagement of reverse gear (R) will not be
as smooth as usual.

114

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Moving off of the car is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually pressing the accelerator pedal.
The more the accelerator is pressed thehigher the pickup torque.
When the ASR system is off (through therelevant ASR OFF button) max pickup is obtained (“sprint" starting)

WARNING
After a request to shift
gear with the car stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car move,the driver must always check thedisplay to see that the gear engaged is the one required.

– With the car stopped and a gear engaged always keep the brake pedal presseduntil deciding to move off;
– during prolonged halts with the engine
running it is advisable to keep the gearbox inneutral;– when the car is parked facing uphill, do
not use the moving off manoeuvre to keep
the car still; use the brake pedal and press
the accelerator pedal only when deciding tomove off;– use second gear only when more control is needed for moving off manoeuvres at
low speed;– if, in reverse gear, first gear is engaged
or vice versa, shift gear only when the car
is stopped completely and with the brake
pedal pressed.
Though highly unadvisable, if when travelling downhill for some unexpected reason
the car is set to neutral (N), when the engagement of a gear is requested the system
automatically engages the best gear in relation to the speed of the car to allow thecorrect transmission of torque to the wheels.

When travelling downhill with a gear engaged and the accelerator released (if thevehicle is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch automatically to give the car adequate engine
braking.
For safety reasons the Selespeed system
activates the buzzer when:– clutch overheating occurs while the vehicle is being started; in this case it is necessary to “force” starting avoiding hesitation or, if the car is on a slope, release theaccelerator and use the brake pedalto stop
the car;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged, (e.g.: it moves forwards with reverse gear engaged; in this situation it is necessary to stop the car and engage the correct gear, keeping the brake
pedal pressed.

STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary press thebrake pedal.
Regardless of the gear engaged and theoperating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY) the system automatically disengages
the clutch and shifts to a lower gear.
If deciding to move off again without having stopped the car completely, the mostsuitable ratio will be available for accelerating again.
Stopping the car the system automatically engages first gear (1).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGS

Still due to safety reasons, with the car stationary, the engine running and gear (1),(2) or (R) engaged, the system activatesthe buzzer and automatically shifts to neutral (N) when:– no action is made on the accelerator
and/or brake pedals for at least 3 minutes;– the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake are not touched for atleast 1 second.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

115

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

OPERATION
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),
in which the driver directly decides when to
shift gear.
– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.
The CITY mode can be selected by pressing the specific button CITY on the gearbox
lever knob; when this mode is selected, the
CITY sign appears on the display.

SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)
In the operating mode, the reconfigurable
multifunction display on the cluster shows
the gear engaged.
In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.

When changing gear it is not necessary
to release the accelerator pedal because theSelespeed system directly controls the engine in such a way as to:

The requests to change gear may takeplace through:– reduce and then increase engine torque;– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 104);– steering wheel stalks (fig. 105),
which can be operated only when the car
speed exceeds 2 km/h.

A0A0097m

116 fig. 104– adapt the engine speed to the latest
gear engaged.
When downshifting, the engine is accelerated automatically to bring it to the speed
necessary with the new gear ratio.
The neutral command (N) is accepted until the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h. The
reverse gear engagement command (R) is
accepted only if the vehicle is stationary.

A0A0098m

fig. 105

A0A0096m

fig. 106

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY button(A-fig. 106) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.

– when slowing down the clutch is opened
and the transmission ratio is automaticallyreduced to be ready for picking up again;otherwise, when the car is stopped, thegearbox will automatically be in firstgear(1);– requests to change gear that would takethe engine to above maximum speed or below minimum speed are not accepted;– if jamming occurs during gear engagement, the system firstly tries to engage thegear required again and, if it is still not possible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving the carinneutral.
IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait for
the end of a gear shifting operation before
requesting another one, to avoid multiple
requests in rapid succession.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)
The automatic operating mode CITY is selected pressing button (A-fig. 106) at thebase of the gearshift lever.
In addition to the gear, the reconfigurable
multifunction display shows the word CITY
(fig. 99).
The system decides directly when gearshifting according to the engine running speed
and the driving style.
Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.
FAILURE WARNING
Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are shownby the t warning light (fig. 100) connected with the associated failure message,
both shown on the display.
When the system is turned on (turning theignition key to MAR), the warning lightshould turn on glowing steadily for about
4 seconds and then turn off.

If the warning light stays on it means thata fault to the gearbox has been detected; atthe same time a buzzer sounds intermittently for 4 seconds to attract the driver's
attention.

WARNINGIf warning light t andthe message appear on thedisplay, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to have the fault eliminated.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In the “MANUAL” operating mode there
are certain automatic/security devices whichsimplify driving:

In the case of a fault to the gearshift control lever, the system automatically engages
the automatic operating mode CITY to
make it possible to reach the nearest Alfa
Romeo Authorised Service to have the fault
eliminated.
In the case of a fault to other gearbox components, the system only allows the engagement of certain gears: first gear (1),second gear (2) and reverse (R).

117

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGIn the event of a gearbox
fault to any component,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services as soon as possible tohave the system checked over.

• the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;

BUZZER WARNINGS

PARKING THE CAR

The buzzer is activated when:

To park the car safely it is absolutely
necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse (R) and also the hand brake if theroad is on a slope.

– reverse gear is engaged (R);– the car is parked with the gearbox inneutral (N); signal that can be noted turning the ignition key to STOP;– clutch overheating occurs when moving
off;– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged (e.g.: the car moves
downwards with reverse gear engaged);– in the event of gearbox failure;– the system has shifted automaticallyto neutral (N) when:• an attempt is made to start the engine
with a gear engaged and the brake pedal is not pressed completely;• the driver’s door is opened and no action is made on the accelerator andbrake for at least 1 second;• a gearbox failure has been detected.

Turning off the engine with the car on an
uphill slope and a gear engaged, it is absolutely necessary to wait for the reconfigurable multifunction display showing
the gear engaged to go off before releasing
the brake pedal, so that the clutch is completely inserted.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and wanting to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot on thebrake pedal it is necessary to engage 1stgear (1) or (R).

• no action is made on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;

118

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TOWING THE CAR
IMPORTANT For towing the car follow
local regulations. Make sure that the gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the car
moves if pushed) and tow as for a car withnormal mechanical gearbox following the instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle but contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

WARNING
While towing the car do
not start the engine.

GLOVEBOX
On the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.

WARNING
Never travel with theglovebox open: the lid
might harm the passenger in theevent of an accident.

GRAB HANDLES (fig. 109)
Suitable grab handles are fitted above thedoors and rear side windows.

To open use handle (A-fig. 107).
When the glovebox is opened with the key
at MAR an inside courtesy light turns on(A-fig. 108).

The fitting is completed by device (B), on
the lid, for inserting a pen or pencil.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the glovebox, the light inside can only be turned on for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

A0A0108m

fig. 107

A0A0109m

fig. 108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0110m

fig. 109

Alfawiki.nl

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

INTERIOR FITTINGS

119

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARFRONT ROOF LIGHT (fig. 110)
The roof light comprises two courtesy lights
with corresponding control switch.
IMPORTANT When a door is opened
the roof light turns on and timing of about
3 minutes is activated automatically, after
which it goes off; closing the doors (within
the 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7
seconds is activated to allow vehicle starting.

A0A0111m

Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The lights are turned off moving the ignition key to MAR (with the doors closed).
With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights are turned on when a door
is opened.
Pressing switch (A) to the left (position0), the lights stay off (OFF position).
Pressing switch (A) to the right (position
2) both lights stay on.
Switch (B) turns the lights on individually.
Pressing switch (B) to the left (position0) the left light is turned on. Pressing theswitch to the right (position 2) the right lightis turned on.
With switch (B) in the central position (position 1) the lights stay off.

120 fig. 110

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP turning the roof light on is only possible for 15 minutes; after which, the system turns it off to avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the central position. By so doing, the roof lights willturn off when the doors are closed. Forgetting a door open the lights will turn off automatically after a few seconds.

REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 112)

On the back of the driver’s or passenger’s
sun visor, opening the cover (A) the roof
lights turn on (B) at the side of the courtesy
mirror, with the ignition key at MAR. Theselights allow use of the courtesy mirror when
the light is poor.

IMPORTANT When a door is opened,
the roof light turns on and a timing of about
3 minutes is activated, after which it turns
off; closing the doors (within 3 minutes) a
second timing of about 7 seconds is activated to allow the car to be started.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the lights can be activated only for
15 minutes; after which the system turns
them off to avoid draining the battery.

Unlocking the doors using the remote control, the roof light turns on gradually and timing is activated automatically for about 15
seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The light turns off in any case turning theignition key to MAR (with the doors
closed).

A0A0112m

fig. 111

When switch (A) is in the central position (0) the light turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the light stays off.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the light stays on.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the roof light can be turned on for
only 15 minutes; after which it is turned off
to avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the roof light turns
off when the doors are closed.

A0A0432m

121

fig. 112

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

On the light there is a switch with threepositions.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

COURTESY LIGHTS (fig. 111)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 113)
(for versions/markets
where applicable)

DETERRENT LED (fig. 114)

The light (A) housed in the doors turns onwhen the associated door is opened, regardless of the position of the ignition key.

The led (A) on the instrument cluster
comes into operation when the doors arelocked (ignition key at STOP or removed)
and it remains in the “deterrence” condition,
flashing with a red light until the next timethe doors are unlocked.
IMPORTANT If a door or the tailgate
are not closed perfectly, the deterrent led
flashes at a higher frequency for 4 seconds
and then flashes at normal frequency again.

A0A0243m

122 fig. 113

To use the ashtray open the lid (A).
To use the ashtray, with the key at MAR,press button (B); after a few seconds the
button will return automatically to its initial
position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
Remove the tray to empty and clean theashtray (C).
The position of the cigar lighter in relation
to the ashtray and viceversa, may vary depending on the trim level.

A0A0005m

fig. 114

A0A0433m

fig. 115

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER (fig. 115)REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 116)
For the rear passengers there are two concealed ashtrays.
To use or remove pull in the direction of
the arrow.
CD COMPARTMENT(fig. 117) (for versions/markets where applicable)

Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.

The interior fittings are completed by theremovable card holder recess(A) and glass
holder (B) located at the centre of the dashboard. To use them, press as shown.

To open the CD compartment, press it asshown by the arrow.

WARNING
Do not use the ashtray as
waste paper basket: it
might set on fire in contact withcigarette stubs.

A0A0515m

fig. 117
A0A0434m

fig. 116

A0A0116m

fig. 117/a

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CARD HOLDER RECESS ANDGLASS HOLDER (fig. 117/a)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle withcare and prevent its use by children: danger of fire and/or burning.

123

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARODDMENT POCKETS
ON THE DOORS (fig. 118)ODDMENT RECESSES ON
CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 119)REAR ODDMENT POCKETS(fig. 120)

Each door has an oddments pocket (A).

On the centre console, at the side of thehand brake lever, depending on the versions,the following recesses are provided:

These are at the side of the rear seats inthe side trim (A).

– oddment recess (A);– magnetic card or toll ticket holder (B);– pen or pencil holder (C);– coin holder (D).

A0A0117m

124 fig. 118

A0A0471m

fig. 119

fig. 120

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0435m

The visors can be directed at the front andside.
Behind the visors have a courtesy mirror
with a light at the side (A). To use, open
the cover (B).
The lights allow use of the mirrors with dim
light.

CELL PHONEPROVISION
The car may be fitted with a provision for
installing a cell phone.
The mobile phone provision consists in:– Radio + cell phone dual-purpose antenna;– Connection and supply cables with specific connector for connecting hands-free kit.

The voice kit should bepurchased by the customer
as it must be compatible
with the customer’s phone.

ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft, etc.)
or accessories that in any case burden theelectric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, whose qualified personnel,
besides suggesting the most suitable devices
belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will
also evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the vehicle’s electric system is able to withstand the load required,or whether it needs to be integrated with amore powerful battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SUN VISORS (fig. 121)

A0A0121m

For the installation of acell phone and connection
to the provision in the car,
contact only Alfa Romeo Authorised Services; this will guarantee
first-rate results with no possibility of any inconvenience that may
compromise the safety of the vehicle.

125

fig. 121

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELL PHONES
Cell phones and other radio transmitter devices (CB for instance) may not be used inside the car, unless a separate aerial is used
fitted outside the car.
Moreover the transmission and reception
efficiency of these devices may be downgraded by the screening effect of the car
body.

WARNINGThe use of cell phones, CB
transmitters or the like inside the passenger compartment(without outside aerial) produces
radio frequency electromagnetic
fields which, amplified by the resonance effects inside the passenger
compartment, may cause, besides
potential health hazards for thepassengers, also malfunctioning of
the electronic systems with which
the vehicle is fitted, such as engine
control unit, ABS/EBD control unit
etc., which could adversely affectvehicle safety.

126

SUNROOFWARNING
Improper use of the sunroof
can be dangerous. Before
and while operating it, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sunroof in motion or by personal items
drawn or knocked by it.

WARNING
Do not open the sunroofwith snow or ice on it:
damage may result.

With the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 122), in the direction of the arrow, choosing one of the 6
opening positions available.
To close the roof, take the control knob(A) to the centre position.
The sunroof is fitted with a sliding curtain
below, which prevents sun radiation and isdrawn by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when it
opens and is pushed completely inside theroof panel when the sunroof is opened completely. With the closing movement, it will
come out partially so that the hand catchis accessible (fig. 123).

A0A0123m

WARNING
Open and close the sunroof
only with the vehicle stationary.

fig. 122

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SLIDING FORWARDS/
BACKWARDSIMPORTANT If the car is fitted with asafety anti-crushing system, after locking thedoors, keeping the corresponding remotecontrol button pressed for about 2 seconds,
triggers automatic closing of the roof andwindows. The button should be pressed until the roof and windows have completed
their stroke; releasing the button sooner, thewindows and roof will stop in the position
they are in at that moment.

On all versions, after releasing the doors,
keeping the corresponding remote control
button pressed for about 2 seconds, obtains
opening of the roof and windows.
RAISING AT THE REAR
With the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 124), in the direction of the arrow, choosing one of the three
opening positions available.
To close the roof, move the control knob(A) to the centre position.

A0A0125m

fig. 123

If the electrical control device does notwork the sunroof can be operated manually as follows:– apply leverage in the points shown by
the arrows and remove the plate (Afig. 125);– insert a special Allen wrench in the seat(B) with hexagon slot;– then turn the wrench clockwise to open
the roof or counter-clockwise to close.

A0A0124m

fig. 124

A0A0126m

fig. 125

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

EMERGENCY OPERATIONGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
When leaving the vehicle
the ignition key should be
removed to prevent the sunroof
from being operated inadvertently
and harming anyone remaining in
the vehicle.

127

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The tailgate can be opened:from the outside of the car - by aremote control impulse;from the inside of the door - by depressing the button (A-fig. 126).
IMPORTANT The non perfect hatchback
closure is shown by the ´ symbol being
turned on as the same time as the dedicated message on the re-configurable multifunction display.

A0A0129m

OPENING FROM INSIDE(fig. 126)OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 127)

Tailgate is released electrically and this canbe performed only when the ignition key
is in position MAR with car at a standstillor in STOP or PARK position for 3 minutes without unlocking/locking one of thedoors.

The tailgate can be opened by remote control from outside pressing the button (A),also when the electronic alarm is engaged.
Opening of the tailgate is accompanied bya double flash of the direction indicators;
closing is accompanied by a single flash.

To unlock the tailgate, press button (A)on the centre console panel.

If an electronic alarm is fitted, with the
opening of the tailgate, the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system “beeps”
twice (with the exception of certain markets).

Tailgate raising is facilitated by the gas
shock springs.

Closing the tailgate again, the control functions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).
The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
tailgate raising with theweights foreseen by the manufacturer. The arbitrary addition of
items (such as spoilers, etc.) may
compromise the correct operationand safety of the actual tailgate.

128 fig. 126

fig. 127

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0131m

To lock, push in correspondence with the
Alfa Romeo badge to lower tailgate, until
you feel the click of the lock.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHTING (fig. 128)
When the tailgate is opened the light turns
on automatically (A) in the right-hand sideof the boot. Closing the tailgate, the lightturns off automatically.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the tailgate, turning on thelight will only be possible for 15 minutes;
after which the system turns it off to avoid
draining the battery.

EMERGENCY OPENING
OF TAILGATE
To succeed in opening the tailgate from theinside, should the car battery be flat, or because of a defect of the electric lock of the
tailgate itself, proceed as follows (refer to“Extending the Luggage Compartment” inthe chapter “Getting to know your car”):– remove rear headrests;– tilt the rear seat cushions;– tilt the backrests;
Operate on lever (A-fig. 129) as shown,to achieve the tailgate mechanical release,
operating from the inside of the luggage
compartment.

A0A0132m

fig. 128

The loads carried may be secured straps
hooked to the special rings (A) in the boot.
The rings also serve for fastening the luggage restrainer, if present (in any case available c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).
CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.

A0A0373m

fig. 129

A0A0133m

fig. 130

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SECURING THE LOAD (fig. 130)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TAILGATE CLOSING129

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Do not load the boot above
the permitted maximum(see “Technical specifications”). Also make sure that the objects contained in the boot are well secured
to prevent them from being thrownforward,causing harm to the passangers.

BONNET
The bonnet opening lever is under the left
end of the dashboard.
To open:– pull the lever (A-fig. 131) until thebonnet clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 132)
upwards.
– raise the bonnet.

WARNINGA heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passengers.

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

WARNING
If you want to carry reserve fuel in a can, follow
legal regulations, only using a certified can, suitably fastened to theload securing eyelets. Even in thisway the risk of fire is increased in
the case of an accident.

130

WARNINGDANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.
When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in theengine compartment, take special
care not to bump the head on theraised bonnet.
WARNINGIf checks are needed in theengine compartment, when
it is still hot, do not approach thefan: it might start working alsowith the ignition key removed.
Wait for the engine to cool down.

A0A0436m

fig. 131

A0A0437m

fig. 132

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNINGDo this only with the car
stationary.

WARNING
For safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.
Always check for proper bonnet
locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.

ROOF RACKPROVISIONIMPORTANT Closely follow the assembly instructions provided in the kit. Assembly must be carried out by skilled personnel.

The front hooks are in points (Afig. 133).
The rear hooks are located in the points (B)shown by the serigraph (▼) on the side rearwindows.

WARNING
After a few kilometres,check that the fastening
screws are firmly tightened.

WARNING
Distribute the load evenly
and when driving, bear inmind the increased sensitivity toside wind.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNING
Scarves, ties and other loose
clothing might be pulled bymoving parts.

Never exceed the maximum permissible loads (see“Technical Specifications”
chapter).

To close:– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cm
from the engine compartment and then let
it drop, ensuring that it is fully closed andnot just held in position by the safety catch.

A0A0232m

Follow the regulations inforce concerning maximum
clearances.

If the bonnet does not close properly do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

fig. 133

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

131

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHTS
The adjustment of the headlights is vital toyour safety and comfort and to that of other road users.
The adjustment of the headlights is also
governed by precise regulations.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.
IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect,
since it is a natural occurrence due to lowtemperature and to the degree of humidity
in the air; it will soon disappear as soon as
the lights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seepage, refer to the Alfa Romeo Dealership.

COMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 134) (excluding versions
with Xenon headlights)
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the backwards tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be adjusted correctly.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), on
the plate at the side of the steering column:– press the arrow on the button (S), thiswill lower by one position (eg.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟1 ➟ 0);The display (B), in the tachometer shows
the positions while adjustment is beingmade.

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– position 3: driver + maximum permissible load all stowed in luggage compartment

WARNING
Check beam aiming every
time the load carriedchanges.
A0A0199m

fig. 135

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– position 0: one or two people occupying the front seats– press the arrow on the button (A), thiswill increase by one position (eg.: 0 ➟ 1➟ 2 ➟ 3);

A0A0467m

132 fig. 134

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:

The dipped-beam headlights are adjusted
for circulation in the country in which the vehicle is marketed. In countries with opposite
circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehicles it is necessary to cover the areas of theheadlight as shown below; this is done using non-transparent sticker tape.
The illustration refers to passing from righthand drive to left-hand drive.

GAS DISCHARGEHEADLIGHTS(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The gas (xenon) discharge headlights operate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient saturated with pressure xenon, instead of theglow filament.
The resulting illumination is sensibly higher to that of conventional lamps, both forlight quality (clearer light) and for the widthand positioning of the illuminated area.
The advantages of better illumination canbe perceived (due to less eyesight fatigue
and greater orientation capacity for the driver, which in turn means higher driving safety) especially in case of bad weather, fog
and/or insufficient road signs, thanks to thebetter illumination of the side parts of thevisual field, normally obscured.
The large increase of the side part illumination increases driving safety since it allows
the driver to better see the other users on
the edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclists
and bikers).

The triggering of the voltaic arc requires avery high voltage, while subsequent power
supply can take place at a low voltage.
The headlights achieve their top luminosity approx. 15 seconds after they are switchedon.
The intense light produced by this type ofheadlights requires the use of an automatic system to keep headlight trim constantand avoid dazzling the vehicles coming fromthe opposite direction in case of braking, acceleration or when carrying loads.
The electric mechanical system for automatically keeping the trim constant, makes
unnecessary the device for compensating
the headlight dip and the visual indicationof the position on the display.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARHEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 135)

Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.

WARNINGIf necessary, have the system checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

133

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS braking system, which prevents the wheels from locking when braking, makes full use of the grip
and within the limits of the grip available,
keeps the car controllable also in emergency
braking.
When braking a slight pulsing accompanied by noise may be felt on the brake pedal due to the action of the ABS system.
This should not be interpreted as a braking malfunction. It is the signal to the driverthat the ABS has come into action: it is thewarning that the car is travelling at the limit of its grip and therefore the speed should
be adapted to the type of road.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebase braking system; in the event of a failure it is disabled, leaving the braking system in the same conditions as a vehicle without ABS.

If you have never previously used cars fitted with ABS, it is advisable to practice a little on a slippery surface, naturally in safety conditions and in accordance with the local Highway Code you are also advised toread the following instructions carefully.
The advantage of the ABS over a conventional system is that it makes it possible toobtain the highest degree of handling also
when braking completely under limited grip
conditions, preventing the wheels from locking.
However, with the ABS do not expect thebraking distance to always shorten: for example, on soft surfaces like gravel or fresh
snow or a slippery surface, the space might
increase.
To better exploit the possibilities of the anti-lock system in the case of need, the advice given below should be followed.

In the case of a failure, the anti-lock action
is no longer present, the braking capacity ofthe vehicle is not adversely affected at all.

134

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The ABS better exploits thegrip available, but cannot
increase it; caution is therefore necessary on slippery surfaces, without taking unnecessary risks.

WARNING
If the ABS cuts in it meansthat the limit of grip is being reached between the tyre andthe road surface: it is therefore
necessary to slow down to adapt
driving to the grip available.

WARNINGIn the event of a system
failure, with the turning onof the > warning light on the
instrument cluster, have the carchecked immediately by Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services driving slowly, to be able to have the system restored to fully efficient conditions.

The most important advice of all, however, is this:WARNING
When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the pulsing on thepedal, do not lighten the pressure,but keep the pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the least space possible,
compatibly with the conditions of
the road surface.

Following these instruction you will be in
the best braking condition under all circumstances.
IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS may
only be fitted with the wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of type and brand approved by
the Manufacturer.

WARNING
The car is fitted with anelectronic braking distributor (EBD). If the > and x warning lights turn on simultaneouslywith the engine running, this indicates an EBD system failure; in thiscase with sharp braking the rear
wheels might lock too early, withthe possibility of skidding. Driving
extremely carefully, go to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service
to have the system checked.

WARNING
The turning on of only the> warning light with theengine running normally indicates afault to the ABS system only. In thiscase the braking system is still efficient, though without the aid of
the anti-lock device. Under these
conditions performance of the EBD
system may be reduced. In this casetoo, you areadvised to go immediately to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service to have the system checked over, driving in sucha way as to avoid sharp braking.

IMPORTANT If the battery is run down
the > and x warning lights might turnon when starting the engine and go off after starting. This should not be considered
as a fault but as a warning that during starting the ABS is not active. The turning offof the warning lights ensures normal system
operation.

WARNING
If the low brake fluid level x warning light turns
on, stop the car immediately andcontact the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service. Any loss of
fluid from the hydraulic system
will negatively affect the operation of the braking system be it of
the conventional type or of thetype with ABS.

The system is completed by the EBD (Electronic Brake Distributor) which distributes
the braking action through the control unit
and the ABS system sensors.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Always take due car when braking on
bends, even with the help of the ABS.

135

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

VDC SYSTEM(Vehicle Dynamics Control)
The VDC is an electronic system that controls vehicle stability, intervening on the driving torque and braking the wheels in a differentiated manner, in the lack of grip, it
helps to bring the car back to the correct
direction.
When travelling the car is subjected to lateral and longitudinal forces which can becontrolled by the driver as long as the tyresoffer adequate roadholding; when this falls
below the minimum level, the car begins
to divert from the course required by the driver.
Especially when travelling on an unevensurface (such as paving, or due to the presence of water, ice or soil), changes in speed(acceleration or braking) and/or course(bends or the need to avoid obstacles) may
cause the tyres to lose grip.

WARNING
The performance of thesystem, in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must in
any case always be adapted to theconditions of the road surface, visibility and traffic. The responsibility for road safety is always andin any case the driver’s.

The VDC system helps the driver to keep
the car under control in the event of a lossof tyre grip.
The forced induced by the VDC system tocontrol the loss of vehicle stability always
depend on the grip between the tyre andthe road surface.

The VDC system is engaged automatically when the car is started and cannot beswitched off.
The basic components of the VDC systemare:– an electronic control unit that processes the signals received from the various sensors and brings about the most appropriate
strategy;– a sensor that detects the position of thesteering wheel;– four sensors that detect the turning
speed of each wheel;– a sensor that detects rotation of the cararound its vertical axis;– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration(centrifugal force).
The heart of the VDC system is the VDC
control unit, which with the data suppliedby the sensors installed on the car calculates
the centrifugal forces generated when the
car is cornering. The yawing sensor, which
originates from the aeronautical industry, detects the rotations of the car around its own
vertical axis. The centrifugal forces generated when the car is cornering are detected by a highly sensitive lateral acceleration
sensor.

When the sensors detect the conditions
that would lead to skidding, the VDC systemintervenes on the engine and on the brakes
producing a stabilising torque.

136

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

HOW THE VDCSYSTEM WORKS

The control unit processes the information
received from the sensors and therefore able
to know the position of the car instant by instant and compare it with the course the driver would like to follow. In the event of adiscrepancy, in a fraction of a second thecontrol unit chooses and commands themost suitable intervention to bring the car
immediately back to the required course:
braking one or more wheels at different intensity and, if necessary, reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

CUTTING IN
OF THE VDC SYSTEM
The cutting in of the VDC system is indicated by the flashing of the á warning lighton the instrument cluster, to inform the driver that the car is in critical conditions of stability and grip.
VDC system failure warning
In the event of a failure the VDC systemdisengages automatically and the á warning light on the instrument cluster turns on
glowing steadily, together with the message
on the reconfigurable multifunction display.

WARNINGFor the VDC system towork correctly, the tyres
must be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, in perfect conditions and above all of the specified type, brand and size.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The stabilising action of the VDC system isbased on the calculations of the system electronic control unit, which processes the signals received from the steering wheel rotation sensor, acceleration sensor and rotation
speed sensor of ech wheel.These signals allow the control unit to recognise the manoeuvre the driver intends to do when thesteering wheel is turned.

In the event of a VDC system failure thecar behaves like a vehicle not fitted with thissystem: in any case it is advisable to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon
as possible.

The corrective actions are modified andcontrolled continuously in seeking the course
required by the driver.
The action of the VDC system considerablyenhances the active safety of the car in very
critical situations and it is particularly helpful when the grip conditions of the road surface change.

137

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARASR SYSTEM(Antislip Regulation)
The ASR function controls the vehicle drive and cuts in automatically every time one
or both driving wheels slip.
In slipping conditions, two different control
systems are activated:
1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,
being caused by excessive power transmitted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

WARNING
The performance of thesystem in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must in
any case be adapted to the conditions of the road surface, visibility and traffic. Road safety is always the driver’s responsibility.

SWITCHING ON
THE ASR FUNCTION
The ASR function switches on automatically each time the engine is started.
When travelling the device can be switched
off and on again pressing switch (Afig. 136) on the centre console.
Function disconnection is shown by the relevant led on the switch itself being turnedon and by the dedicated message displayedon the re-configurable multifunction display.
Should the function be disconnected whenrunning, it will automatically be activatedagain at the next ignition and the re-configurable multifunction display will inform
user about this condition by displaying a dedicated message.

2) if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is slipping, with
an effect similar to that of a self-locking differential.
The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of dynamic load changes
or excessive acceleration.

A0A0140m– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions of
the road surface.
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozen
surfaces.

138– in the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).

fig. 136

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT When travelling on snow
with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn
the ASR device off: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.
ASR system failure warning
Should a defect arise, the ASR system is
automatically disconnected and the re-configurable multifunction display informs user
about this condition by displaying a dedicated message.
In the event of an ASR system operating
failure, the car behaves in the same way
as a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) installed on the car meets Directive
98/69/CE (EURO 3).
This system allows continuous diagnosisof the components on the car correlated withemissions; it also alerts the driver, by turning on the warning light U (on some versions together with the message + symbolon the reconfigurable multifunction display)on the instrument panel when these components are no longer in peak conditions.
The objective is:– to keep system efficiency under control;– warn when a fault causes emission levels to increase over the threshold establishedby European law;If, turning the ignition key
to MAR, the warning light
U does not turn on or if,
while travelling it turns on glowing steadily or flashing together
with the message + symbol on thereconfigurable multifunction display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGFor correct operation of the
ASR system the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brandand type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of thespecified type, brand and size.

IMPORTANT After eliminating the inconvenience, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorised Services are
obliged to run a bench test and, if necessary
road tests which may also call for a long journey.

– warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced with appropriate
tools, which makes it possible to read theerror codes stored in the control unit, together with a series of specific parameters
for engine operation and diagnosis.

139

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIO PRESETTINGSYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car, if not delivered with sound system, is fitted with a glove compartment on
the instrument panel (fig. 136a).
Sound system presetting system includes
the following:– sound system power cables;– front and rear speaker power cables;– aerial power cable;– sound system housing;– aerial on car roof.

The sound system shall be installed in theproper housing occupied by the glove compartment that can be removed by pressing
the two retaining tabs fitted in the glove
compartment: here are the power cables.
If after buying the car you
want to install the soundsystem, contact first Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whose
qualified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
electric absorption to safeguard thebattery. Excessive loadless absorption could damage the battery
and lose warranty.

Connector A
A1 N.C.
A2 N.C.
A3 N.C.
A4 + 30 (battery-powered)
A5 Aerial power supply
A6 Light
A7 + 15 (key-powered)
A8 Ground
Connector B
B1 RH rear speaker
B2 RH rear speaker
B3 RH front speaker

The wiring diagram is the following (fig.
136b):
A0A0715m

A0A0709m

B4 RH front speaker
B5 LH front speaker
B6 LH front speaker
B7 LH rear speaker
B8 LH rear speaker

140 fig. 136afig. 136b

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

INTRODUCTION
The fixed radio, fitted with Compact Discplayer and parametric sound equaliser has
been designed in accordance with the specific features of the passenger compartment,with a personalised design that blends withthe style of the dashboard.
The radio is installed in a user-friendly position for the driver and passenger and thegraphics on the front panel make locationof the controls quick, facilitating use.
The CD-Changer for 10 discs, if present,
is housed in the right-hand side of the boot.
To increase safety against theft, the set is fitted with a protection system that allows theuse of it only on the car on which it was originally fitted.
Below you will find the instructions for use,which you are advised to read through carefully. The instructions also contain the procedure for controlling the CD-Changer
through the radio. For the instructions foruse of the CD-Changer refer to the specificmanual.

ADVICERoad safety
You are advised to learn how to use thevarious radio functions (e.g. storing stations)
before starting to drive.

WARNING
Too high a volume whendriving can put the driver’s
life at risk and that of other people. Therefore the volume should
always be adjusted in such a waythat it is always possible to hear
the noises of the surrounding environment (e.g. horns, ambulance,
police sirens, etc.).
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
when driving. Reception may be disturbed
by the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges particularly when far away from thestation being listened to.
IMPORTANT When receiving traffic information, the volume may be higher thannormal.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Care and maintenance
The radio structure ensures long operation
with no need for particular maintenance.
In the event of a fault, contact Authorised
Alfa Romeo Services.
To clean the front panel only use a soft,
antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing products might spoil the surface.
Compact Disc
Remember that dirt, marks or distortion on
Compact Discs can cause skipping and poorsound quality. For top performance conditions, we give the following advice:– Only use Compact Discs which have thefollowing brand:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC PLAYER– Carefully clean all Compact Disc of fingerprints and dust using a soft cloth. Support Compact Discs from the outer circumference and clean from the centre outwards.

141

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– Never use chemical products for cleaning (e.g. spray cans, antistatics or thinners)
as they might damage the surface of Compact Discs.– After use, put Compact Discs
back in their container, to avoid marks or
scratches that may cause skipping whenplaying.

To remove fingerprints and dust, use a soft
cloth starting from the centre of the Compact Disc outwards.
No

To remove a Compact Disc from its container, press the centre and raise the disccarefully, holding it by the outer circumference.
Removing the disc

Notes on Compact Discs
Do not stick labels on the surface of theCompact Disc or write on the surface withpens or pencils.

– Do not expose Compact Discs to direct
sunlight, high temperatures or damp for prolonged lengths of time to prevent them frombending.
– Do not stick labels or write on the recorded surface of Compact Discs with pens or
pencils.

IMPORTANT If the CD is copy-protected, the system may need few seconds before starting to play it.

No

New discs may be rough around the edges.
When these discs are used, the player might
not work or the sound might skip. To remove
the roughness from the edge of the disc use
a ball-point pen etc.
Ball-point pen

Do not use solvents like stain removers,
antistatic sprays or thinners in commerce forcleaning Compact Discs.

Roughness

Proper way to holdthe compact discNo

Always hold Compact Discs by the outercircumference. Never touch the surface.

IMPORTANT Do not use the protective
sheets for CD in commerce or discs with stabilisers, etc. as they might get stuck in theinternal mechanism and damage the disc.

142

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No

GENERAL

Compact Disc Section

The set possesses the following functions:– Disc select (disc no.)Radio section– PLL tuning with FM/MW/LW frequency bands– RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic information) - PTY (Program Type) - EON(Enhanced Other Network) - REG (Regional
Programmes) functions

Do not expose Compact Discs to direct sunlight or any source of heat.
No– Alternative frequency search selection in
RDS mode (AF function)– Emergency alarm reception provision– Track select (forward/backward)– Fast forward/backward– Repeat function (repetition of last piece)– Scan Function (scanning the tracks on
the Compact Disc)– Mix Function (random playing)– TPM Function (storing CD track playing
sequence)– CLR Function (clearing CD track storage).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Do not use highly scratched, cracked, or
distorted discs, etc. The use of these discs
will involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.

– Automatic/manual station tuning– Manual storage of 30 stations:18 in the
FM band FM (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band MW and 6 in the
LW band– Automatic storage (Autostore function)of 6 stations in FMT band

To obtain the best sound quality, use original CD supports. Correct operation is not ensured if not correctly written CD-R/RW supports and/or with capacity higher than 650
MB are used.

– SENS DX/LO function (sensitivity adjusting in searching radio stations)– Scan Function (scanning stored stations)– Automatic Stereo/Mono switching.

For installation and connection of the CD-Changer
apply only to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

143

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARWARNINGOn multimedia CDs in addition to sound tracks also
data tracks are recorded. Playing
one of these CDs may cause rustlingand such a volume as to compromise road safety, as well as causing damage to the final stages andspeakers.

CAUTIONSPROTECTION AGAINST THEFT

If it is very cold inside the car and the CD
player is used a little after turning the heateron, a film of damp may form on the Compact Disc or on the player optics and thesound may not be perfect. In this case do
not use the CD player for at least an hour,
so that the condensation dissolves naturally and normal operation is resumed.

The radio is fitted with an antitheft protection system based on the exchange of information between the radio and the electronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car. This system warrants the highest level of security and prevents entry of
the secret code every time the radio supply is disconnected.

Sound section

Driving on rough roads with heavy vibrations may cause skipping when the CD player is working.

After every re-connection an automatic
check procedure is performed during which
the display shows the wording “CANCHECK” for about one second. If the resultof the check is positive, the set starts working, whereas if the comparison codes are
not the same or if the radio is connected forthe first time to the vehicle electric system,
the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the procedure described in the following paragraph.

– Pause Function– Loudness Function (except versions with
BOSE HI-FI system)– 7 band graphic equalizer– Separate bass/treble adjustment– Right/left and front/rear channel balancing.

During the code entry procedure the display shows the word “CODE”. The set will
not work until the correct code is entered
This way the protection system makes theradio unusable after removal from the dashboard in the case of theft.

144

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Entry of the secret code is required to allow the radio to work after the first connection to the vehicle electric system or toa different Body Computer than the originalone.
Connecting the radio to the car supply, thedisplay will show the wording “CODE” forabout 2 seconds, followed by four dashes“- - - -”.
The secret code comprises four figures from
1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, press
the corresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.
If the four figures are not entered within
20 seconds, te display shows the word
“CODE” for 2 seconds and then four dashes “- - - -”. This is not to be considered
as an incorrect code entry.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20
seconds), the radio starts to work.

If a wrong code is entered, the radio
sounds a “beep”, the display shows theword “CODE” for 2 seconds and then four
dashes “- - - -” to inform the user that itis necessary to enter the correct code.
Every time the user enters a wrong code,
the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,
2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min, 1h,
2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a maximum of 24 hours.
The waiting time will be shown on the display with the word “WAIT”. When thisgoes off it is possible to start the new code
entry procedure.

GLOSSARY
AF (Alternative frequency)
Function that allows the radio to stay tunedon the FM station selected also passing
through areas served by transmitters withdifferent frequencies.
In fact the RDS system keeps the intensity and quality of the signal received undercontrol, automatically switching tuning on
the frequency of the transmitter that is sending the strongest signal.
Autostore/Travelstore

Code Card

Function with which it is possible to automatically store radio stations.

This is the document that certifies possession of the radio. The Code Card contains
the radio model, serial number and secretcode.

Balance (Channel balancing)

IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card carefully to be able to give the related data to
the competent authorities in the event oftheft.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAREntering the secret code

Function with which it is possible to appropriately adjust the sound from the rightor left speakers
Bass
This function adjusts the bass tones.
CD-Changer
Multiple Compact Disc player.

145

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLR (Clear)

Distant/Local (Sens Dx/Loc)

Function with which it is possible to clear
all the tracks of the CD stored with the TPM
function.

These are the two levels of reception sensitivity.

EON (Enhanced Other Network)
Function that allows the radio to tune automatically on a different radio station thanthe one being listed to which broadcasts traffic information.
Fader
Function with which it is possible to appropriately adjust the sound from the frontor rear speakers.
Hicut (Treble reduction)
Function with which it is possible to reduce
the treble tones, in accordance with the signal transmitted.

1) Distant (maximum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune all the stations thatcan be received.
2) Local (minimum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune only those stations
with sufficiently strong signals, such as forexample local stations.

With this function it is possible to listen to
the next or previous track on the cassette.
Mute
Function which, if activated, for example
in the presence of a cell phone in the car,brings the volume to zero when a phone callis being made/received.
Presettings

Loudness
A function that automatically emphasises
the bass and treble tones when listening, at
low level. It is cut off with the volume set
to the maximum.
Mix
This function is used to randomly select a
Compact Disc among those present in theloader and all the tracks on this Compact
Disc are played in random sequence.

146

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

MSS(Searching previous/next track)

Number of radio stations that can be stored
manually or automatically.
PTY (Program Type)
This function allows the presetting of a category of programmes such as for instance,
news bulletins, music, sport, etc. The set automatically gives priority to the type of programme selected when transmission starts,
interrupting the one in progress.

Scrolling

TA (Traffic information)

This is a radiophonic information system
which uses the 57 kHz subcarrier of normal
FM broadcasts.

Function with which it is possible to receive
different programmes in the same network(in the FM band only).

Function with which it is possible to receive
the traffic information broadcast by the stations enabled, also when tuned to anotherstation or listening to a cassette, CD, or during a phone call.

With this function it is possible to receive
different types of information such as traffic bulletins and station names and to automatically tune to a station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme.
REG (Regional transmission
reception function)
Function with which it is possible to tune
only to local (regional) stations.
RepeatFunction with which it is possible to continuously listen to the last track played on
the Compact Disc.
Scan
Function with which it is possible to listen
for a few seconds to all the radio stations
stored, or the beginning of all the tracks contained on the Compact Disc.

PLL Tuning
Digital tuning with Phase Lock Loop circuit
to obtain the best radio channel tuning.

TPM (Track Program Memory)

Soft Mute

Function with which it is possible to store
the sequence for playing the tracks of a CD,
to be able to play them later in the sequence
set.

Function that gradually highers and lowers the volume when Mute is turned on or
off.
Sound Flavour

TrebleGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RDS (Radio Data System)

This adjusts the treble tones.

A function that sets the best equalizing possible depending on the type of music selected (Classic, Jazz, Rock, etc).
SVC
Function that automatically adjusts the level of the volume to the speed of the car tomaintain the ratio with the noise level in thepassenger compartment.

147

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

A0A0230m

fig. 137
CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL(fig. 137)
1. AF-TA Function select button:– AF (alternative frequencies)– TA (traffic information)
2. PTY

3.

Function select button:– RDS PTY (type of RDS programme)– Choice of the subject of
PTY transmission in EON
mode
Compact Disc slot

148

4. ¯¯

Selected sound and menu adjustment and manual station
search button

5. ˚

Compact Disc eject button

6. ▲Sound and Menu select button and automatic station
search7. ˙˙Selected Sound and Menu
function adjustment and manual station search

8. ▼Sound and Menu select button and automatic station
searchAlfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

9. MENU-PS Menu and Scan function button (hearing
stored stations in sequence)
10. 6

Function select button:– Call station no. 6– Store station no. 6

12. 4-RPT Function select button:– Call station no. 4– Store station no. 4– Continuous CD track playing
13. BN-AS Radio frequency range selectfunction (FM1, FM2, FMT,
MW, LW) - Autostore
14. SRC-SC Operating mode select button Radio - Compact Disc CD-Changer and Scan function (hearing stations in sequence)
15. 3-II

17. 1-TPM Function select button:– Call station no. 1– Store station no. 1– TPM function (storing CD
playing sequence)
18. AUD-LD Sound function select button: bass tones, treble
tones, right/left andfront/rear balancing and
Loudness (except versions
with BOSE HI-FI system)
19. VOL- Volume lowering button
20. ON-z Function select button:– Set on/off– Mute on/off
21. VOL+ Volume highering button

Function select button:– Call station no. 3– Store station no. 3– CD playing pause

CONTROLS ON THE STEERINGWHEEL (fig. 138)
The main radio function controls are repeated on the steering wheel, to allow easier control.
1. Volume increase button
2. Volume decrease button
3. Mute button
4. Radio frequency range select button(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and available sources (Radio - Compact Disc - CDChanger)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

11. 5-MIX Function select button:– Call station no. 5– Store station no. 5– Random CD track playing

5. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 1 to
6)
– Compact Disc player: select next piece

A0A0100m

16. 2-CLR Function select button:– Call station no. 2– Store station no. 2– CLR function (CD track storage clearing)149

fig. 138

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

6. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 6 to
1)
– Compact Disc player: select previous
track.

Multifunction buttons (5) and (6)Volume adjustment and Mutebuttons

Press button (5) to select stations from
1 to 6 or to listen to the next track on a CD.

The buttons for volume adjustment (1) e(2) and for turning Mute on/off (3) workin the same way as the corresponding buttons on the radio.

Press button (6) to select stations from
6 to 1 or to listen to the previous track on
a CD.

Radio frequency and soundsource select button
To cyclically select the radio frequencies
and sound sources, briefly and repeatedlypress button (4).
The frequencies/sources available are:
FMI, FMII, FMT, MW, LW, CD*, CDC**.
(*) Only if the Compact Disc is inserted(**) Only if the CD-Changer is connected

Multifunction buttons (5) and (6) call thepreset radio stations, or select the next/previous track when listening to a Compact
Disc.

FUNCTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS (fig. 137)
Switching on

Turning the radio off
To turn off keep the “ON”button (20)pressed again
If the ignition key is turned to STOP when
the radio is on, it will turn off automatically and turn on again the next time the key
is turned to MAR.
Selecting the Radio/Compact
Disc/CD-Changer functions

The set is turned on keeping the “ON”
button pressed (20). If the radio was on
before the engine was turned off, it will turnon again automatically the next time the engine is started.

Briefly and repeatedly pressing the “SRC”
button (14) it is possible to select the following functions in sequence:

If the radio is turned on with the ignition
key at STOP, it will turn off automaticallyafter about 20 minutes.

– CD (only if the Compact Disc is inserted)

With the ignition key at MAR the “ON”
button is always lit to facilitate turning on
the radio.

150

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When the radio is turned on again it will
resume with the same settings that were
working before turning off, with the exception of the volume which, if it was set toabove 20, it is activated at 20.

– TUNER (Radio)– CHANGER (only if the CD-Changer is connected).
After each change of the sound source, forabout 2.5 seconds, the display shows thefunction selected: TUNER (Radio), CD(Compact Disc), CHANGER (CD-Changer).

IMPORTANT When listening to the radio with a Compact Disc inserted and the
CD-Changer connected, pressing the “SRC”
button (14) will select the last function used
between Compact Disc and CD-Changer.
Pause function
If while listening to a Compact Disc anotherfunction is selected (e.g. the radio), playing
is stopped and when the Compact Disc modeis resumed. it starts again from the point
in which it was stopped.
If while listening to the radio another function is selected, when the Radio mode isresumed, it is tuned to the last station selected.

Volume adjustment
Press button “VOL+” (21) to higher thevolume or “VOL-” (19) to lower it.
Pressing the button briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the display shows the wording “VOL” and the volume level (from 0 to 66).
If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin or during useof the phone (if the voice feature is installed), the new setting is maintained only until the end of the bulletin or phone call.
Volume changing with speed
The SVC function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
To activate the SVC function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9), then use buttons “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)to scroll the menu functions stopping on the
SVC function and buttons “˙˙” (7) or“¯¯” (4) to turn the function on or off selecting respectively “SVC ON” or “SVC
OFF”.
This function can be turned on or off in all
the operating modes of the device (Radio/Compact Disc/CD-Changer).

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mute function (turning off thevolume completely)
To turn on the Mute function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “z” button (20).
The volume will lower gradually (Soft Mutefunction) and the display will show
“MUTE”.
To turn the Mute function off, briefly press
the “z” button again (20). The volume
will increase gradually (Soft Mute function)
returning to the value set before using theMute function.
The Mute function is also turned off pressing one of the volume adjustment buttons“VOL+” (21) or “VOL-” (19): in thiscase the volume is changed directly.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The functions that cannot be selected (e.g.
“CD” when the Compact Disc is not inserted) are disabled automatically. If the Compact Disc is not inserted and the CD-Changer is not connected, pressing the “SRC” button (14) for about 2.5 seconds the display
will show only “NO CD”.

With the Mute function on, all the otherfunctions can be used and if a traffic bulletin arrives with the TA function on or an
emergency alarm is received, the message
ignores the Mute function.

151

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Soft Mute function

Balance adjustment

When the Mute function is turned on oroff, the volume lowers or increases gradually (Soft Mute function). The Soft Mutefunction is also activated when one of thesix presetting buttons, the “BN” button(13) or “ON” button (20) is pressed.

Proceed as follows:

Tone adjustment
Proceed as follows:– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”
button (18) until the display shows thewording “BASS” or “TREBLE” (Bass or
Treble select function)– press “▲” (6) to increase the basses
or trebles or “▼” (8) to lower them.
Pressing the buttons briefly, the change
is gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,
the change is fast.
For a few seconds the display shows thelevels of the basses/trebles (from -6 to +6).
After about 5 seconds from the last adjustment the display returns to the main radio screen.

– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”
button (18) until the display shows thewording “BALANCE” (Balance function
select)– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or “▼” (8) to increase the sound from the left speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly, the change
is gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,
the change is fast. For a few seconds thedisplay shows the balancing levels from R+9
to L+9 (“R” = right, “L” = left). Afterabout 5 seconds from the last adjustment,
the display returns to the main radio screen.
Fader adjustment
Proceed as follows:– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”
button (18) until the display shows thewording “FADER” (Fader select function)– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers or “▼” (8) to increase the sound from the front speakers.

152

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Pressing the buttons briefly the change is
gradual by steps. Pressing them longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the display shows the fader levels from R+9 to
F+9 (“R” = rear, “F” = front).
After about 5 seconds from the last adjustment the display returns to the main radio screen.
Loudness Function(except versions with
BOSE HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, increasing the basses and trebles. It is cut off
when the volume is set to maximum. To
switch the function on/off keep the “AUD”(18) pressed until hearing the “beep”. The
function condition (on or off) is shown on
the display for a few seconds by “LOUDON” or “LOUD OFF”.
On versions with BOSE HI-FI system the
Loudness function is activated automatically by the amplifier.

The only buttons active during phone calls
are:If the voice kit is installed on the car, whena phone call is received the radio sound isconnected to the phone input. The telephonesound is heard with a fixed volume, but it
can be adjusted during the conversation using “VOL+” (21) to higher the volume or“VOL-” (19) to lower it.

– “VOL+” (21), “VOL-” (19): forvolume adjustment

The fixed telephone volume can be adjusted through the “PHONE” function of
the menu (see“MENU” paragraph).

– “ON” (20): turning the radio on/off– “AF-TA” (1): traffic information.
While the sound is off for a phone call, thedisplay shows the word “PHONE”.
The sound of the phone call will be interrupted in the case of transmission of a traffic bulletin or a PTY31 announcement; if
wishing to interrupt the bulletin press the“AF-TA” button (1).

RADIO (fig. 137)
When the set is turned on the last function
selected before turning off is played (Radio,
Compact Disc or CD-Changer).
To select the Radio function while listening
to a Compact Disc, briefly and repeatedlypress the “SRC” button (14) until thisfunction is selected.
Selecting the frequency band
If in the Radio mode, briefly and repeatedly press the “BN” button (13) to selectthe required reception band.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

TELEPHONE PROVISION(fig. 137)

Every time the button is pressed the following bands are selected in sequence“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”, “MW” and“LW” shown by the respective wording on
the display.
The FM band is divided into section: FM1,
FM2 and FMT.
The FMT reception band is reserved to thestations stored automatically with the Autostore function.
The radio is always ready to receive stations in the RDS Mode (Radio Data System).

153

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Presetting buttons

Automatic tuning

Manual tuning

The buttons with the symbols 1 to 6(“17”, “16”, “15”, “12”, “11”,“10”) make it possible to choose the following presettings:

Briefly press (less than 1 second) “▲”(6) or “▼” (8) to start automaticallysearching the tuning for the next station that
it is possible to receive in the direction chosen.

This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.

– 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 inFM2, 6 in FMT)
– 6 in the MW band– 6 in the LW band– 6 types of PTY programming (only in
the FM mode when PTY is selected).
To call a preset station, choose the required
frequency band and then press briefly (lessthan 1 second) the corresponding preset button (from 1 to 6). For a few seconds thedisplay will show the number of the station
preset and the related frequency before
showing the frequency band and the nameof the RDS station.
Storing the last station heard
The radio automatically keeps in storage
the last station heard for each reception
band, which is then tuned when the radio isturned on or the reception band is changed.

if “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) is pressed for
longer (over 1 second) quick searchingtakes place: upon having tuned in to the firstwell receivable station, the tuner stops forabout 1 second (in Mute) before quick
searching continues. When the button is released, the tuner stops on the next receivable station.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the tuner only searches stations which broadcast traffic bulletins.
If the PTY function is on, the tuner only
searches PTY stations. When searching thedisplay alternatively shows the type of programme and the word “SEARCH”.
If the station on which the tuner stops is
one of the stations stored with the preset
buttons, the display will show the presetting
number for a few seconds.

154

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Select the band with the “BN” button(13): FM1, FM2, FMT, MW or LW.
– Briefly and repeatedly press “¯¯” (4)or “˙˙” (7).
– Pressing the button longer (over 1 second) obtains fast forward searching , whichis stopped when the button is released.
To turn on manual tuning search it is necessary to turn off the PTY and AF (alternative frequencies) functions, if on.
If the station tuned is a station stored withthe preset buttons, the display will show thepresetting number for a few seconds.

Keeping the “SRC” button pressed (14).
Each station found will be heard for a few
seconds and the name and frequency will
flash on the display. While searching, thedisplay will show “FM-SCAN”, “AMSCAN” or “PTY-SCAN” for a few seconds.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the system will search only the stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins. If the PTY function is on, the system will only search PTY
stations.

The Scan function is interrupted in the following cases:– turning the set off– pressing “SRC” (14)– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (starts
manual or automatic tuning)– pressing a preset button– turning Autostore on– turning PTY on/off– changing the chosen frequency band

When the Scan function is on, all the other functions are cancelled.

– pressing “AUD” (18)When wanting to continue listening to astation selected during scanning, press“SRC” (14) again.

– when a station is found that is broadcasting a traffic bulletin, if the TA function
is on– pressing “MENU” (9)Scanning preset stations
Press the “MENU” (9) button for a prolonged length of time to start scanning thepreset stations in the present frequency
band:– FM: FMI 1, FMI 2, ..., FMI 6, FMII 1,
FMII 2, ... FMII 6, FMT 1, FMT 2, ..., FMT 6– MW: MW 1, MW 2, ..., MW 6
– LW: LW 1, LW 2, ..., LW 6.
Each preset station will be heard for a few
seconds and its name or frequency will flashon the display, if the signal intensity is sufficient. In passing from one presetting to another the display will show the word
“SCAN” for about 2 seconds.

– inserting a Compact Disc.

In the first 2 seconds in which the new preset station is heard, the display shows thecurrent frequency band and the number ofthe pre-select button.

In any case the search function will beturned off after scanning the frequency
band, even if no station is selected.

If the TA function is on (traffic information),
the system will only search stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Station scanning (Scan function)

155

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The preset station Scan function is interrupted in the following cases:– turning the set off– pressing “BN” (13)– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (starts
manual or automatic tuning)– pressing a preset button– turning Autostore on

Manual station storage
The station being heard can be stored in
the range selected with buttons (17),(16), (15), (12), (11), (10) numberedfrom 1 to 6.
Keep one of these buttons pressed (from1 to 6 until receiving the confirmation“beep”. After storage, the display shows thenumber of the button with which the station
has been stored.

– turning PTY on/off– changing the sound source (CD, CDChanger)– changing the FM level or frequency band
selected– pressing “AUD” (18)– pressing “MENU” (9)– when a station is found that is broadcasting a traffic bulletin, if the TA function
is on– inserting a Compact Disc.
If no presetting has been selected, hearing the station chosen previously will be resumed.

Autostore function
To turn on the Autostore function keep the“BN” button (13) pressed until hearing
the confirmation “beep”. With this function
the radio automatically stores the stations
with the strongest signal in decreasing orderof intensity of the FMT frequency band.
IMPORTANT Activating the Autostore
function cancels the stations stored previously in the FMT Band.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),
only the stations that send traffic information will be stored. This function may also
be turned on when listening to a Compact
Disc or the CD-Changer.

156

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

During automatic storage the display willshow the wording “A-STORE”. To interrupt the storage process press the “BN”
(13) button again: the radio will automatically tune to the station heard before activation of the Autostore function.
At the end of the Autostore function the radio automatically tunes on the first preset
station in the FM1 band.
On buttons (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) numbered from 1 to 6, the stations are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the preset
band.
After storage the radio automatically tunes
on the frequency stored on button 1 (17).
Every station is stored only once, except
in the case of regional programmes whichin certain cases might be stored twice.
During the automatic storage process thedisplay shows the wording “A-STORE”.

– at the beginning of the Autostore function all the other functions are disabled– any change in volume is not shown on
the display– pressing one of the radio function buttons, for example “PTY” (2), “˙˙” (7),“¯¯” (4), (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) the automatic storage process
is interrupted, the last station heard before
Autostore was turned on is tuned and thefunction associated with the button pressedis run– pressing “AF-TA” (1) during automatic storage will interrupt it, the TA function (traffic information) will be turned
on/off and a new automatic storage process
will be started

Listening to stored stations
Proceed as follows:– select the required frequency band (FM,MW, LW)– briefly press one of the six station storage buttons.
The display will show the number that corresponds to the button.
In bands FM1, FM2 and FMT, if reception
is poor and the AF alternative frequency
search function is active, the station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme will be sought automatically.

– Changing the sound source (Radio, Compact Disc, CD-Changer) during automaticstorage, Autostore is not interrupted.

AF Function(alternative frequency search)Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:
AF ON: alternative frequency search on
AF OFF: alternative frequency search off.
When the signal of the RDS station tuned
weakens, the following two cases may occur:– With AF ON the RDS system activates
automatic tuning of the optimum frequencyof the station chosen, with the stations enabled, therefore the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest signal that is broadcasting the same programme. During the journey it will thus bepossible to continue listening to the station
chosen without having to change the frequency when changing area. Of course, thestation being listened to must be receivablein the area the car is crossing.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The behaviour of the set during Autostore
is as follows:– With AF OFF the radio will not tune
the strongest station automatically and it
will have to be found manually using thetuner buttons.

IMPORTANT Sometimes the Autostore
function is unable to find 6 stations with astrong signal. In this case, the free presetting
buttons will be shown on the display, forabout 2 seconds, by 4 dashes and the last
station heard will be returned.

157

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

To turn alternative frequency search AF of
the station chosen on/off, keep the “AFTA” button pressed (1) pressed until hearing the “beep”. The name RDS (if available)
stays on the display and if the AF function
has been turned on the symbol “AF” isshown.
If the radio is working in the AM band,
when the “AF-TA” (1) is pressed, it passes to the FM band on the last station selected.
TA function(traffic information)
Some stations in the FM band (FM1, FM2
and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast information about traffic conditions. In thiscase the display shows the wording “TP”.
To turn on/off the traffic information TA
function briefly press (less than 1 second)the “AF-TA” button (1).
The listening conditions and information
given on the display may be the following:
TA and TP: if tuned to a station that sends
traffic information and the traffic information function is on

TP: if tuned to a station that sends traffic information but the traffic information
function is off

The operations to be carried out for eachof the three above conditions are listed below.

TA(*): the traffic information function is
on but the radio is tuned to a station that
does not give traffic informationa) To receive stations enabled to broadcast traffic information:

TA and TP not shown on the display: theradio is tuned to a station that does not give
traffic information and the traffic information function is off.

– briefly press (less than 1 second) the“AF-TA” button (1) so that the display
shows “TA”.
– press the tuner buttons “˙˙” (7) or“¯¯” (4).

(*) If the traffic information function TA is on,
but the radio station chosen does not give traffic information, the device “beeps” every 30 seconds.

With the TA function on (traffic information) it is possible:a) to search only RDS stations that transmit in the FM band, enabled to broadcast
traffic informationb) receive traffic information even if theCompact Disc player or CD-Changer is in usec) receive traffic information at a predefined minimum volume even with the radio volume off.

158

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– select band FM1, FM2 or FMT

To store stations with TA on, carry out thestorage operations (see “Manual station
storage”).
b) If wishing to receive traffic information when listening to a Compact Disc, before inserting the Compact Disc or turningon the CD-Changer, tune to a station enabled
to broadcast traffic information (TP) andturn on the TA function. If while listening to
the Compact Disc, this station broadcasts
traffic information, the Compact Disc will besuspended temporarily and resumed again
automatically after the end of the message.
At the start of reception of traffic information, the display will briefly show “INFOTRA”, while the display continues giving
further information (frequency, name, timeof CD etc.).

If wishing to interrupt the traffic information message, briefly press (less than 1 second) the “AF-TA” button (1) during transmission of the message.
c) To receive traffic information while notlistening to the radio:– turn on the TA function, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) “AF-TA” button (1),so that the display shows “TA”
– tune to a station enabled to transmit
traffic information so that the display
shows“TP” take the volume to zero keeping the “VOL-” button pressed (19).
This way, if that station broadcasts traffic
information, this will be heard at a minimum
predefined volume.

IMPORTANT In certain countries radio
stations exist which, even if the TP function
is on (the display shows “TP”), do nottransmit traffic information.
If the radio is working in the AM band
when the “AF-TA” button (1) is pressed,
it passes to the FM band on the last station heard. If the station selected does notbroadcast traffic information (wording “TP”
not shown on the display), the search foran enabled station starts automatically.
The volume with which the traffic bulletin
is transmitted varies depending on the listening volume:– listening volume below 30: traffic bulletin volume = 20 (fixed value)

IMPORTANT If the TA function is on
and the station tuned is not able to provide
traffic information or it is no longer able toprovide this information (the display will notshow “TP”), so after 1 minute in which theradio is in these conditions:– if listening to a Compact Disc anotherstation is sought that is enabled to transmit traffic information– if when listening to the radio a “beep”
is given to alert that it is not possible to receive traffic information; to interrupt it, it isnecessary to tune to a station that can provide traffic information or switch off the TA
function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

If the Compact Disc player is already working and at the same time you want to receive traffic information, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) the “AF-TA” button(1) the radio tunes to the last station heard
in the FM band, the TA traffic information
function is activated and the traffic messages
are transmitted. If the station selected does
not send traffic information, the search foran enabled station starts automatically.

– listening volume above 30: traffic bulletin volume the same as the listening volume + 1.
If the volume is changed during a trafficbulletin the value is not shown on the display and the new value is kept only for thebulletin in progress.
During a traffic bulletin it is possible to turnon sound adjustment with the “AUD” button (18). The new values set are also kept
at the end of the bulletin.

159

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Emergency alarm reception

The list of the various subjects comprises:

In the RDS mode the radio is set to receive
emergency announcements in the case of
exceptional circumstances or events that
may cause general danger (earthquakes,
floods, etc. ) if they are broadcast by thestation tuned.

NEWSThis function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.
Program Type Function (PTY)(selecting a typeof programme)
To turn on the PTY function, which makes
it possible to give top priority to PTY programmes, when present, which may involve
emergency messages or various topics (e.g.
music, news bulletins) briefly press the“PTY” button (2) until the display shows“PTY” and the subject of the last station
heard (e.g. “NEWS”).
IMPORTANT To turn on the PTY function, the radio must be in the FM band.
If the station does not broadcast in the PTY
mode, the wording “NO-PTY” is shownon the display for 5 seconds.
After 2 seconds the station name or frequency is shown on the display.

AFFAIRSINFOSPORTEDUCATE

If no station is available with this type ofprogramme the system sounds a “beep”,
the station selected previously is heard andfor 2 seconds the display shows the wording “NO-PTY”.

DRAMA
CULTURESCIENCE
VARIED(Variety)

POP M
ROCK M
M, O, R, M (Middle of the Road Music)
LIGHT M

(Light music)

CLASSICSOTHER M

(Other music)

To change the type of PTY programmepress “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7) or one of
the 6 preset buttons. If the display shows
the station frequency or name, pressing“¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7) the current typeof programme will be displayed.

160

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To store the current type of programme on
one of the 6 preset buttons, give a prolonged press (over 1 second) on the preset button. Storage is confirmed by a“beep”. To seek a station with this programme see the “Automatic tuning” and“Scanning stations (Scan Function)” paragraphs.

To turn the PTY function off briefly press
the “PTY” (2) button again.

To know the type of PTY programme ofthe station heard, keep the “PTY” (2)pressed until a “beep” is heard. After the“beep” the display will show the type of programme (see previous paragraph) offeredby the station tuned. If the station has no
PTY code, the display will show the wording“NO-PTY”. After about 5 seconds the display will again show the RDS name or frequency of the station tuned.

Scrolling transmissions
It is possible to receive different programmes in the same network and scroll
them in FM Band only) - e.g.: NDR1, NDR2,
NDR3, NDR4, N-JOY...
To turn on this function, briefly press the“AF-TA” button (1) to turn on the AF function. The user can then start scrolling pressing “˙˙” (7) or “¯¯” (4).
IMPORTANT The station must havebeen received previously at least once.
Stereophonic stations

EON Function(Enhanced Other Network)

If the signal received is weak, the device
switches automatically from Stereo to Mono.

Some countries have circuits which group
together several stations enabled to broadcast traffic information. In this case the programme of the station being heard, will beinterrupted temporarily to receive traffic information (only with the TA function on),every time these bulletins are given by oneof the stations of the same circuit.

MENU (fig. 137)
Functions of “MENU” button (9)To turn on the menu function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9). The display will show the word
“MENU”.
To scroll the Menu functions use “▲” (6)or “▼” (8). To turn on/off the function selected use “˙˙” (7) or “¯¯” (4).
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu are
the following:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Controlling the station’s type of
PTY programme– EQ SET (Equalizer settings, only if theequalizer is on)– PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/
ROCK/JAZZ (Turning on/off and choosing predefined equalizer adjustments)– HICUT (Treble reduction)– PHONE (Volume of phone, if installed)– CD NAME (Allocation of CD names,
only with CD inserted)– SVC (Automatic volume control in relation to speed)– SENS DX/LO (Tuning sensitivity)– CD (CD display setting)161

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– CDC (CD-Changer display setting, if installed)

To turn on the equalizer, select one of thefollowing with “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) :Equalizer settings(only if the equalizer is on)– REG (Regional programmes).

– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user)

To set a personal equalizer adjustment, use“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) “USER”; the display
shows “EQ SET”.

– IGN TIME (Switching off mode)
To exit the Menu function, press the“MENU” button again (9).
Turning the equalizer on/ off(except versions with BOSE HI-FI
system)The integrated equalizer can be turned on
or off. With the equalizer off, it is possible
to change the sound settings only adjusting the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the function
makes it possible to adjust the sound curves.
To turn the equalizer off, select “PRESET” with “▲” (6) or“▼” (8).

– “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer adjustment)– “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjustment)– “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjustment).
After selecting the last adjustment set in
the Menu using ▲” (6) or “▼” (8) use,“˙˙” (7) or “¯¯” (4) to change it.
When one of the equalizer settings is on,
the display shows “EQ”.
On versions with BOSE HI-FI system, analogue equalizing in amplitude and phase of
the signal is done automatically by the amplifier.

162

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To change the equalizer settings, use“˙˙” (7) or “¯¯” (4). The display
shows a graph with 7 bars, where each bar
represents a frequency for the left or rightchannel. Choose the bar to be adjusted using “˙˙” (7) or “¯¯” (4); the bar chosen starts to flash and it is possible to adjust
it using “▲” (6) or “▼” (8).
To store the new settings, press the“MENU” button again (9). The display stillshows “EQ SET”.

Allocating a name to a CD
(CD NAME)

Using this function it is possible to reduce
the treble tones, in accordance with the signal transmitted. To turn this function on/off,use “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7).

This function can be chosen only if a Compact Disc is inserted. To turn on, use “¯¯”(4) or “˙˙” (7): the display will show
“CD-NAME”. If the CD already has a
name, this will be shown on the display, if
not, eight dashes will be shown. If storage
is no longer available for a new name, thedisplay will show the first name stored.

The display will show the current statusof the function:– “HICUT ON”: function on– “NO HICUT”: function off.
Phone volume adjustment
function (PHONE)
With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 1 to 66) or cut off (OFF setting) the telephone sound.
To turn on/off, use “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙”
(7).
To adjust the sound, use “VOL+” (21)or “VOL-” (19).
The display will show the current statusof the function:– “PHONE 23”: function on with volume setting 23

To change the name or give a name to the
new CD press “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7).
Press the buttons again to choose the position of the character to be changed. Press“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose or change
the character.
To store the name, press the “MENU”
button again (9). The display will show
“CD-NAME”.
To clear a name, turn the function on andpress “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose thename to be cleared, then press the“MENU” button for about 2 seconds (9).
The system beeps and the display shows“ONE CLR” for about 2 seconds. At thispoint the procedure can be started to give a
new name.

To clear all the names, turn the function
on and keep the “MENU” button pressed
for about 4 seconds “MENU” (9). The set
gives two beeps and the display shows“ALL CLR” for about 2 seconds. At thispoint, it is possible to start the name allocation procedure.
Volume changing with speedfunction (SVC)The SVC function makes it possible to automatically adapt the volume level to the
speed of the car, increasing it as the speed
increases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Treble tone reduction function(HICUT)

To turn the function on/off use “¯¯” (4)or “˙˙” (7). The display will show the current status of the function:– “SVC-ON”: function on– “SVC-OFF”: function off.

– “PHONE OFF”: function off.

163

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Tuner sensitivity
adjustment (SENS DX/LO)

Compact Disc data display
function (CD)Regional broadcast receptionfunction (REG)

With this function it is possible to change
the sensitivity of automatic station searching. When low sensitivity is set “SENSLO” only stations with excellent reception
are sought, when high sensitivity is set“SENS-DX” all stations are sought. Therefore, if the car is in an area with a considerable number of stations and you want tochoose only those with a strong signal, set
to low sensitivity “SENS-LO”.

With this function it is possible to choose
the information shown by the display, when
listening to a Compact Disc.

Some national broadcasters, at determinate times of the day, transmit regional programmes which differ from region to region.
This function makes it possible to tune in only on local stations (regional). However if
a regional programme is heard and you wish
to stay tuned to it, the function must be activated.

To set the sensitivity, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙˙” (7). The display will show the current status of the function:– “SENS-LO”: low sensitivity– “SENS-DX”: high sensitivity.

Two settings are available:– TIME (time elapsed since the start of
the track)– NAME (CD name).
After choosing “CD” in the Menu using“▲” (6) or “▼” (8), the display
shows“CD-DISP”. To change the setting
use “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7).
CD-Changer data display function(CDC) (if installed)
This function can be chosen only if a CDChanger is connected. In this case the display will show “CDC-DISP”.
To change function, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙˙” (7).
The display shows the setting among thetwo possible: “TIME” and “CD-NR”.

164

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To turn the function on/off, use “˙˙”(7) or “¯¯” (4).
The display will show the current statusof the function:– “REG-ON”: function on– “REG-OFF”: function off.
If the function is off and a regional programme is tuned that works in a determinate area and the car enters a different area,
the regional station of the new area is received.
IMPORTANT When the function is off(“REG-OFF”) and the AF function is on(alternative frequencies) the radio automatically tunes to the frequency of the station selected with the strongest signal.

With this function it is possible to choose
if when turning the engine (or the instrument panel) off, the sound system shallturn off immediately (00 MIN) or if it
shall stay on for other 20 minutes (20MIN).
After selecting “IGN TIME” in themenu using buttons ▲ or ▼, the display
will show the message “IGN TIME”.
To change setting use button ¯¯ or˙˙.
Two settings are available:– “00 MIN”: sound system going off
immediately when turning the engine (orthe instrument panel) off;
– “20 MIN”: sound system staying on
for 20 minutes after turning the engine(or the instrument panel) off.

COMPACT DISC PLAYER(fig. 137)
Selecting the Compact player
To turn on the Compact Disc player integrated in the set, when a CD is already inserted, turn the set on, then briefly and repeatedly press the “SRC” button (14) toselect the “CD” operating mode. Insertinga CD, also with the device off, the CD player is turned on.
Inserting/ejecting a CD
To insert the CD set it gently in place (3)to activate the powered loading system,
which will position it correctly.
Press “˚” (5), with the device on, to operate the powered CD eject system.
After ejection, the source heard before playing the CD will return. The CD cannot beejected if the device is off.
Possible error messages
If the CD inserted is illegible, the display
will show the wording “CD-ERROR” forabout 2 seconds, then the CD is ejected andthe previous source before CD was selected returns.

Display information
When the CD Player is working, the display shows information which has the following meaning:“T05”: shows the number of the track on
the CD“03:42”: shows the time elapsed since
the start of the track (if the corresponding
Menu function is on)“MADONNA”: shows the name given
to the CD.
Select track (forward/backward)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

IGN TIME function

Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the next
track on the CD and “▼” (8) to play theprevious one.
To select tracks continuously, keep the button pressed.
If playing the track started more than 3
seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case if
wanting to play the previous track, press the
button twice consecutively.

165

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Fast forward/backward
Keep “˙˙” (7) pressed to move the track
selected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly backward. Fast forward/backward is interrupted once the button is released.
If the CD name display has been chosen
in the menu, this will be replaced by the
CD time display. After about 2 seconds fromthe last time the button is pressed, the CD
name will be displayed again.
Pause function

Scannning pieces on the
CD (Scan Function)

The Scan function is interrupted in the following cases:

With this function it is possible to hear all
the pieces contained on a CD.

– turning the set off

Keep the “SRC” button pressed (14) forover one second to play the first 10 secondsof each track on the CD. While the track is
playing the display will alternately show, for
2 seconds, the CD function chosen (CD timeor name) and the word ing “SCAN”. If the
Scan function is on, Repeat and Mix are
turned off.
The scanning sequence is the following:

To pause the CD player press the preset
button 3 (15). The display will show “CDPAUSE”.

– from the track played up to the last one
on the CD

To listen again, press the preset button 3
again (15).

– from the first one on the CD up to theone played the moment scanning was started.

– pressing the “SRC” button again (14)to continue listening to the track that was
being played– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (pressing them together the track will be skipped)– pressing a preset button– turning Autostore on– turning PTY on– changing the sound source– pressing “AUD” (18)
– If the TA function is on and the station
selected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin– pressing “MENU” (9).
If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the track
played before scanning was started.

166

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Random playing (MIX function)

Briefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPT
TRACK”.

To start the random playing of tracks on
the Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CDMIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2
seconds the display will show “CD-MIXOFF”.

Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 seconds
the display will show “RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.
Changing the sound source, the function
is turned off.
IMPORTANT When the repeat function
is turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.

When the Mix function is on, all the tracks
on the CD are played in random sequence.
Changing the sound source, the function
is turned off.
IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.

TPM Function(CD playing sequence storage)
With the TPM function (Track program
memory) it is possible to store the sequencefor playing tracks of a CD, to be able to playthem later in the sequence set.
To turn the function on briefly press (lessthan 1 second) the preset button 1 (17),while listening to a CD. When the function
is on, the display shows “TPM”.
To store tracks, select the track required,
then press the preset button 1 (17) for
about 1 second, until hearing the beep; thedisplay will show “STORED”. Repeat thisprocedure for all the other tracks to be stored.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Repeat167

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLR Function(clearing CD track storage)

CD-CHANGER(Compact Disc Player)

With the CLR function it is possible to clear
one or all the CD tracks stored with the TPM
function.

Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo offers two kits
for the CD-Changer (multiple Compact Discplayer) for 5 and 10 discs, complete withmultipolar cable for connection with the radio and a support bracket for assembly.

To clear only one track from storage, select it using buttons “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)when the TPM function is on, then press thepreset button 2 (16) for about 2 seconds;
the TPM function is turned off, a beep isheard and the display shows “TR CLR”.
To clear all the tracks of the CD selectedfrom storage, turn on the TPM function thenpress preset button 2 (16) for about 4 seconds; the TPM function is turned off, a double beep is heard after about 2 and 4 seconds and the display shows “CD CLR”.

Selecting the CD-CHANGER
To turn on the CD-Changer, turn on the set,
then press briefly and repeatedly the “SRC”
button (14) to select the “CHANGER”.
When listening to a Compact Disc for the
first time after putting it in the CD loader,
playing starts from the first track on the first
disc available in the loader.

Possible error messages
If the CD selected is not available due tolack of the loader or because the loader is
not inserted in the CD-Changer, the display
shows “CHANGER”.
If the CD played is illegible the display
shows “CD-ERROR”, the next CD will beselected; if there are no other CDs or if they
are also illegible, the display will show thewording “NO CD” until the sound source ischanged.
In the event of a fault to the CD-Changer
or difficulty in removing the loader, the display will show the wording “CD ERROR”.
Display information
When the CD-Changer is working, the display shows the following information whichmeans:“T05”: shows the number of the track on
the CD“03:42”: shows the time elapsed since
the start of the track (if the corresponding
Menu function is on)“CD 04”: the number of the CD in theloader.

168

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fast forward/backward

Press “¯¯” (4) to select the previous CD
and “˙˙” (7) to select the next CD. If in
the menu the CD time display function was
selected, this will be replaced for about 2
seconds by the CD number.

Keep “˙˙” (7) pressed to move the track
selected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly backward. Fast forward/backward is interrupted once the button is released.

If the loader does not contain a disc in theposition selected, the display briefly shows
the wording “NO CD”, and the next discis played automatically.

A brief press on the button moves the track
forward or backward 1 second.

Select track (forward/backward)

If the CD number display function was selected in the menu, this will be replaced forabout 2 seconds by the CD time display function.

Scanning CD tracks(Scan function)
With this function it is possible to listen to
all the tracks contained on the CD selected.
Keep the “SRC” button pressed (14) for
more than one second to play the first 10
seconds of every track on the CD. While
playing, the display will alternately show for
about 2 seconds the CD function chosen(CD-Name, time or number) and the word
“SCAN”. If the Scan function is on, the Repeat and Mix functions are turned off.
The scanning sequence is the following:

Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the next
track of the CD chosen and “▼” (8) to play
the previous track.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Choosing the CD– from the track played up to the last of
the tracks on the CD

To select tracks continuously, keep the button pressed.

– change of CD and scanning all the tracks(and so on for all the CDs in the changer)

If playing the track started more than 3
seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case if
wanting to play the previous track, press the
button twice consecutively.

– from the first track up to the one played
until the start of scanning.
The Scan function is interrupted in the following cases:– turning the set off– pressing the “SRC” button again (14)to continue listening to the track that was
being played– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (pressing them together the track will be skipped)

169

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– pressing a preset button

Pause function

Random playing (Mix function)– turning Autostore on

To pause the CD-Changer press the preset
button 3 (15). The display will show “CDPAUSE”.

To start the random playing of tracks on
the Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CDMIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2
seconds the display will show “CD-MIXOFF”.

– turning PTY on– changing the sound source– pressing “AUD” (18)
– If the TA function is on and the station
selected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin– pressing “MENU” (9).
If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the track
played before scanning was started.

To resume playing the track, press preset
button 3 (15) again.
RepeatBriefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPTTRUCK”.
Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 seconds
the display will show “RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.
Changing the sound source, the function
is turned off.
IMPORTANT When the repeat function
is turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.

170

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When the Mix function is on, all the tracks
on the CD are played in random sequence.
Changing the sound source, the function
is turned off.
IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.

RadioMaximum power: 4 x 40W.
Aerial (fig. 139)
The aerial is located on the car roof. You
are recommended to slacken and remove
the aerial from the roof to avoid damaging
it when washing the car in an automatic system.

Speakers (fig. 140-141)

Protection fuse

The sound system is formed of a systemcomprising:– 4 tweeters (A) (2 front and 2 rear)
with 30W power

The radio has a 10A fuse located in therear part of the set. To replace the fuse, theradio needs to be pulled out: therefore contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

– 4 speakers (B) with a diameter of 165
mm (2 front and 2 rear) with 40W power.

A0A0439m

A0A0438m

fig. 139

A0A0440m

fig. 141

fig. 140

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARTECHNICAL INFORMATION

171

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR– a bass box with a volume of 12 dm3(B) housed on the left-hand side of theboot;

BOSE HI-FI
SOUND SYSTEMTECHNICAL INFORMATION(fig. 142-143-144)

The BOSE HI-FI system has been accurately
designed for the Alfa 147 GTA, tooffer outstanding sound quality and reproduce the musical realism of a live concert,for all the seats in the passenger compartment.

– four high efficiency woofers (A) with diameter 165 mm, two at the front and twoat the back, each having a coaxial tweeter
inside;System comprises:

The system’s features include outstandingly faithful reproduction of crystalline treble tones and full, rich basses which among
other things, make the Loudness function
superfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole passenger compartment enveloping the occupants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.

A0A0441m

The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated technology, but at the same time they are easy
and intuitive to use, so that even less expert
people can use the system.

172

A0A0442m

fig. 143
A0A0338m

fig. 142

fig. 144

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– a high power HI-FI amplifier (150W)
with 6 channels, analogue equalising in amplitude signal phase and with 130 mm diameter sub-woofer.

The antipollution deviceson the car oblige the use of
only four-star unleaded
petrol with an octane number(R.O.N.) of 95 or over.

Never use leaded petrol,as this would irreversibly
damage the exhaust gas
catalyst. If leaded fuel is added to
the fuel tank, no matter how small
the quantity, DO NOT START THE
ENGINE. Do not attempt to dilutethe fuel in the tank, completely
drain the fuel circuit and tank.

FUEL CAP (fig. 145)
The fuel cap (A) is key-lockable and has acatch to prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens it to the flap (C); to gain access to it,
open the flap then use the ignition key to turncounter-clockwise and remove the cap.
When refuelling, hook the cap to the device on the inner flap, as illustrated.
IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank
may cause light pressurising. A little breathing off, while slackening the cap is absolutely normal.

To prevent accidentally filling with leaded
petrol, the diameter of the fuel tank filler
is of such a size as not to accept the nozzle of this type of petrol.

IMPORTANT For your safety, before
starting the engine, also make sure that thefuel nozzle is correctly inserted in the fueldistributor.

WARNING
Do not go near the fuelfiller with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire. Avoid
going too near the fuel filler withyour face, to avoid inhaling harmful vapours.

A0A0443m

In the case of need, only
replace the fuel cap withanother genuine one, or theefficiency of the fuel vapour recovery system could be adversely
affected.

An inefficient catalyst
leads to harmful emission
at the exhaust, thus environment pollution.

173

fig. 145

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise until one or more clicks are heard; then turnthe key clockwise to lock. Close the flap.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

REFUELLINGGETTING TO KNOW YOUR CARENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTIONEMISSION REDUCING DEVICES

The design and construction of the vehicle have not only been developed with thetraditional aspects of performance and safety in mind, but also take into account the increasingly pressing problems tied to protecting the environment.

The exhaust system is fitted with a catalyst formed of alloys of precious metals; itis housed in a stainless steel container which
is able to withstand the high operating temperatures.

The choice of materials, techniques andparticular parts are the result of work which
has made it possible to drastically reduce
the harmful effects on the environment andguarantee compliance with the most stringent international regulations.

Trivalent catalytic converter(catalytic silencer)

The catalyst converts the unburnt hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitric oxidein the exhaust gas (even in minimal quantity owing to the electronic ignition and injection systems) into non polluting compounds.

USE OF NON-TOXICMATERIALS
None of the components of the vehicle contain asbestos. The padding and the climate
control system do not contain CFCs which
are held responsible for the destruction of
the ozone layer.
The colouring agents and the corrosion inhibitors used on the nuts, screws and bolts
do not contain cadmium or chrome which
could pollute the atmosphere or water tables.

WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached during operation of the catalytic silencer thevehicle should not be parked over
inflammable materials (paper, fuel oils, grass, dry leaves etc.).

174

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Lambda sensors
Lambda sensors measure the content ofoxygen present in the exhaust gas. The signal transmitted by the Lambda sensors isused by the injection and ignition electronic control unit to adjust the air - fuel mixture.
Anti-evaporation system
As it is impossible, even when the engine
is switched off, to prevent the formation offuel vapours, a system has been devised
which traps the vapours in a special activated carbon container.
When the engine is running these vapours
are withdrawn and sent to combustion.

STARTING
THE ENGINEIMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the engine
fails to start, see “The Alfa Romeo CODE system”.

We recommend that during the initial period you do
not drive to full vehicle
performance (for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at
top speed, hard braking etc.).

The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return the
key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine does
not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.

When the engine isswitched off never leave
the ignition key in the MAR
position to prevent pointless current absorption from draining thebattery.

STARTING PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT It is important never topress the accelerator before the engine has
started.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal, so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thegears.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

4) Ensure that the electric systems and devices, especially if they absorb high quantities of energy (e.g. heated rearscreen) areswitched off.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV position and release it as soon as the engine
starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return the
key to STOP then repeat the procedure.

WARNING
Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engines consumes
oxygen and produces carbon
monoxide which is a highly toxic
and lethal gas.

IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start theengine do not insist with extended attempts
which may damage the catalyst, but contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

175

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

IMPORTANT The electric devices
that absorb a high amount of energy (climate control, rearscreen heating etc.) are
cut off automatically during starting.
If the engine does not start at the firstattempt, move the ignition key to STOP
before repeating starting.

WARMING THE ENGINESWITCHING OFF– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without accelerating abruptly.

– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.

– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometres of the journey. Wait until
the engine coolant temperature reaches
50-60 °C.

– Turn the ignition key to the STOP position and switch off the engine.

If starting is difficult (with the Alfa
Romeo CODE system working properly),
do not insist with prolonged attempts.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the cause
is due to low battery charge. Never use abattery charger to start the engine.

176

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT After a tiring journey it isadvisable to let the engine “get its breathback” allowing it to idle a while to lower thetemperature in the engine compartment.

IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe vehicle on the move, the next time itis started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning
light may turn on (Y). In this case, checkthat switching off and starting the engine
again with the vehicle stationary, the warning light stays off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.

EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (Y) warning light on the instrument cluster on glowing steadily) emergency starting may be carried out using thecode of the CODE card.

PARKING
When the vehicle is parked, proceed as follows:– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.

For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.

– Engage first gear if the vehicle is facing uphill or reverse if the vehicle is facing
downhill.

Never bump, tow, or
coast start the vehicle as
this would cause fuel toflow into the catalyst causing irreversible damage.

– Turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will immediately come to a halt if thehandbrake slips.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Sharp accelerating before
switching the engine offshould be avoided. A“kick” on the accelerator serves
no purposes and consumes fuelpointlessly.

To avoid useless consumption of power andpossibly draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.

WARNING
Remember that the servobrake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
has been started, therefore much
more effort than usual is requiredon the brake pedal and steering
wheel.

WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always remove the ignition key
when leaving the vehicle and takeit with you.

177

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARSAFE DRIVING
In designing your Alfa 147 GTA, Alfa Romeo has worked thoroughly to achievea vehicle able to offer top levels of safety toits passengers. However, the behaviour ofthe driver is still a decisive factor for roadsafety.
Below you will find a few simple rules fortravelling safely under different conditions.
You are certainly familiar with many of thembut it is still helpful to read them all carefully.

– Make sure that any child restraint systems (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fastened on the rear seat.
– Place any objects in the boot with care
to prevent abrupt braking from throwing
them forwards.
– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. A
light meal will help to keep reflexes ready.
Above all avoid alcohol.
Routinely remember to check:– tyre pressure and conditions;– engine oil level;

BEFORE DRIVING OFF– engine coolant fluid level and system
conditions;– Make sure the lights and headlights areworking properly.

– brake fluid level;– Adjust the seat, steering wheel and rearview mirrors, in order to obtain a correct position for driving.

– windscreen washer fluid level.

– The first rule for safe driving is care.
– Care also means being able to predict
the actions of other road users.
– Strictly respect the traffic regulations in
all countries, especially the speed limits.
– Ensure that both yourself and your passengers are wearing their seat belts, thatchildren are carried with the appropriate
seats and that any animals are in appropriate compartments.
– Long distances should be tackled in good
health.

– power steering oil level;– Carefully adjust the headrests so thatthe head and not the neck rests on them.
Check that nothing (mats etc.) can get under the foot pedals.

WARNING
Driving under the influenceof drugs and/or somemedicines is highly dangerous foroneself and for others.

178

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WHEN TRAVELLINGWARNING
Take car when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheels
and wheel caps: they might reduce
ventilation of the brakes, thus theirefficiency, during abrupt and repeated braking, or long downhill
slopes.

WARNING
Never drive with objects
on the floor in front of thedriver’s seat: they might get stuckunder the pedals making it impossible to accelerate or brake.

WARNING
Make sure any mats areappropriate in size: even aslight inconvenience to the braking
system may require a higher pedal stroke than normal.

WARNING
Water, ice and salt on theroads may deposit on thebrake disks, reducing the effectiveness of the brakes the firsttime they are used.

– Do not drive for long periods without abreak. During breaks get out of the vehicle
and move around a bit to shake off thedrowsiness.
– Make sure the air in the passenger compartment is changed constantly.
– Never coast the vehicle downhill withthe engine switched off: this eliminates theengine braking and power steering effectthus requiring a greater effort on the pedal
and steering wheel.

NIGHT DRIVING
Here are some suggestions for night driving.
– Drive with particular care: night driving
involves a greater degree of concentration.
– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.
– At the first signs of drowsiness stop thecar: continuing the journey is dangerous foryourself and others. Continue driving only
after sufficient rest.
– Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than in the day: it is more difficult to judge the speed of a vehicle when
only the lights can be seen.
– Ensure that the headlights are correctly
aimed: if they are too low, visibility is reduced and eyesight is tired. If they are toohigh they may cause disturbance to otherroad users.
– Use the main beams only outside builtup areas and only when you are certain that
other drivers are not disturbed by their use.
– When meeting oncoming vehicles,
switch off the main beams and drive withthe dipped-beam headlights on.
– Keep the headlights and light units
clean.
– Outside built-up areas take care of animal crossings.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARWARNING
Always fasten the front andrear seat belts including
those of any children’s seat. Travelling without seat belts increases
the risks of serious injury or evendeath in the event of an accident.

179

CORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING WITH RAINDRIVING IN FOG

MOUNTAIN DRIVING

Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.

– If fog is very thick, avoid travellingwhere possible. If travelling with mist,
ground fog or the possibility of fog banks:– When travelling down hill use the engine braking by engaging lower gears to prevent the brakes from overheating.

– Drive at moderate speed.

– Never coast down hill with the engine
off or in neutral and especially not with theignition key removed.

If the road is wet, the traction between
wheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thusincreasing the stopping distance and decreasing road holding.
Here are a few suggestions in the case ofrain:– Reduce speed and keep further backfrom the vehicle in front.
– Heavy rain also reduces visibility. In
these cases, turn on the headlights even during the day to make yourself more visible
to others.
– Do not drive over puddles at high speed
and hold the steering wheel firmly: you may
lose control of the car (aquaplaning).
– Position the ventilation controls fordemisting (as described in the chapter (“Getting to know your car”), to prevent visibility from worsening.
– Routinely check the conditions of thewindscreen wiper blades.

– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beamheadlights, rear fog guards and front fog
lights. Do not use the main-beam headlights.
IMPORTANT If visibility in some parts
improves, switch off the rear fog guards; theintense light disturbs the occupants of vehicles behind.
– Remember that fog also involves wetasphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types ofmanoeuvres and longer stopping distances.
– Keep well away from the vehicle infront.
– Where possible avoid sudden changes
in speed.
– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.
– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,
impossibility to continue due to poor visibility, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road.
Then turn on the hazard warning lights and,if possible the dipped-beam headlights.
Rhythmically sound the horn if you note another car coming.

180

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine– Drive at a moderate speed and avoid
cutting corners.
– Remember that overtaking up hill isslower and therefore requires a greater
length of clear road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, move over to enable the other vehicle to pass in safety.

DRIVING WITH ABS

Here are a few suggestions for driving inthese conditions:

The ABS is a part of the braking system
which essentially offers 2 advantages:– Drive very slowly.

1) it prevents locking, thus skidding, of thewheels during emergency braking and especially under conditions with poor grip;– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres orsnow chains; see the related paragraphs inthis chapter.
– Use engine braking where possible andavoid abrupt braking.
– Braking with a car without ABS, avoid
locking the wheels, modulating the pressure
on the brake pedal.
– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changesof direction.
– During cold weather even apparently dryroads may be covered with occasional patches of ice. Pay great attention therefore whendriving on roads which are in the shade, orwhere rocks or trees line the road and on
which ice may persist.
– Keep further back from the vehicle infront.

2) it allows braking and steering at thesame time, to avoid any sudden obstacles
or to direct the car as required when braking, compatibly with the physical limits oflateral grip of the tyre.
To make the most of the ABS:
– In emergency braking or when grip islow, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brake
pedal: this means that the ABS has come into action. Do not release the pedal, but continue pressing it to give continuity to thebraking action.
– The ABS prevents the wheels from locking but it does not increase the physical limits of grip between the asphalt and the road.
Therefore, also with a car fitted with ABS,
keep within a safety distance from the vehicle in front and limit speed when approaching bends.

REDUCING RUNNING
COSTS ANDENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION
By following a few simple guidelines, it
is possible to save vehicle running costs andreduce harmful emissions.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONSCORRECT USE OF THE CARDRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE

Vehicle maintenanceThe conditions of the vehicle represent an
important factor which affects fuel consumption as well as travelling tranquillity
and the life of the vehicle. For this reason,
it is wise to take care of its maintenancehave the checks and adjustments carried out
in accordance with the “Scheduled Maintenance Programme” (see... spark plugs, aircleaner, timing).

The ABS serves to increase vehicle controllability not to go faster.

181

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Tyres

Electric services

Check the pressure of the tyres routinely at
an interval of no more than 4 weeks: if thepressure is too low consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher. It
should be underscored that in these conditions tyre wear increases and vehicle performance is lower, therefore also its safety.

Use electric devices only for the amount oftime needed. Rearscreen heating, additional headlights, windscreen wipers and heater
fan need a considerable amount of energy
therefore, increasing the requirement of current increases fuel consumption (up to+25% in the urban cycle).

Useless loads

Climate control system

Never travel with an overload in the boot.
The weight of the vehicle (especially in urban traffic), and its geometry heavily affectconsumption levels and stability.

The climate control system is a further load
bearing heavily on the engine inducing higher consumption levels (up to +20% on average). Outside temperature permitting,preferably use the air vents.

Luggage/ski racks
Remove the luggage rack or ski rack fromthe roof as soon as they are no longer used.
These accessories lower air penetration andadversely affect consumption levels. Whenneeding to carry particularly voluminous objects, preferably use a trailer.

Aerodynamic items
The use of non-certified aerodynamic items
may adversely affect air drag and consumption levels.

Starting
Do not warm the engine with the car at astandstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms up much
more slowly, increasing electrical consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable
to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding
high speeds. This way the engine will warm
faster.
Pointless manoeuvres
Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic
lights or before switching off the engine. Thisand also double declutching is absolutely
pointless on modern cars and also increase
consumption and pollution.
Gear shifting
As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear. Using a low
gear to obtain brilliant performance increases
consumption. In the same way improper useof a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear.

182

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DRIVING STYLE

Fuel consumption considerably increases
with speed: it is helpful to note that passing
from 90 to 120 km/h consumption increases by about +30%. Also maintain aneven as possible speed, avoiding superfluous braking and accelerating again, whichcost in terms of both fuel and emissions. It
is therefore advisable to adopt a “smooth”
driving style trying to anticipate manoeuvres
to avoid imminent hazards and respect safety distances to avoid sudden slowing.
Acceleration
Accelerating heavily taking the engine toa high speed, has a considerably adverse effect on consumption and emission levels;
it is wise to accelerate gradually and not exceed the maximum torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts do
not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results in a significant increase in consumption levels (from+15 to +30% on the urban cycle) and emission of harmful substances.
Traffic situations androad conditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied tosituations with heavy traffic, for example
in queues with frequent use of the lower
gears or in cities with many traffic lights.
Also winding mountain roads and roughroad surfaces adversely affect consumption.
Stopping in the traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) it is advisable to switch the engine off.

ECONOMY ANDENVIRONMENTFRIENDLY DRIVING
Environment protection is one of the principles that guided the development of yourAlfa 147 GTA.
It is not merely by chance that its antipollution devices obtain results far beyond thosespecified by current regulations.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

Top speed

However, the environment still needs theutmost care from all of us.
By following a few simple rules it is possible to avoid damage to the environment
and very often at the same time to limit fuel consumption. On this subject we are giving some helpful suggestions to be added
to those marked with the # in various pointsof this booklet.
Kindly read them all carefully.

183

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CARPROTECTING EMISSION
REDUCING DEVICES
Correct operation of the anti-pollution devices not only guarantees respect for the environment but also influences vehicle performance. Keeping these devices in goodcondition is therefore the first rule for both
environment-friendly and economy driving.
The first precaution is to closely follow the“Programmed Maintenance Schedule”. Use
only unleaded petrol (95 RON) (Specification EN228).
If difficulty with starting is experienced do
not insist with extended attempts. Especiallyavoid bump, tow or coast starts: these may
all damage the catalyst. Only use an auxiliary battery to start the car in an emergency.

If when driving the engine is not runningsmoothly, continue, minimising the need forengine performance and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services as soon as possible.
When the fuel reserve warning light turns
on, fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel level may cause an irregular supply to the engine with inevitable increase of the exhaustgas temperature; this would result in serious
damage to the catalyst.
Never run the engine, even as a test, with
one or more spark plugs disconnected. Do
not warm the engine at idle speed before
moving off, unless the outside temperature
is very low and, in this case too, for no morethan 30 seconds.

WARNING
Do not install other heatguards and do not remove
the existing ones on the catalyst
and exhaust pipe.

184

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Do not spray anything on
the catalyst, lamda sensor
and exhaust pipe.

WARNING
During normal service thecatalyst reaches high temperatures. Do not therefore park
the car over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.): fire hazard.

WARNING
The failure to follow theserules may cause a fire
hazard.

WINTER TYRES

The car does not have the approval to tow
trailers.

These tyres are specially designed for driving on snow and ice, to be fitted in replacement of those fitted on the car.
Use winter tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided on the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services will bepleased to advise you on the choice of the
car most suited to the use the Customer intends to make of it.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of wintertyres, follow the instructions given in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.

IMPORTANT When winter tyres areused with a maximum speed index below
the one that can be reached by the vehicle(increased by 5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in the driver’s
view which states the maximum permissible speed of the winter tyres (as per CE Directive).
Fit the same type of tyre on all four wheels(brand and profile) to ensure higher driving
safety when braking and good handling.

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

TRAILER TOWING

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should be
replaced.
Due to the winter features, under normal
conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres is lower than that of normal tyres.
It is necessary therefore to limit their use to
the purposes for which they are certified.

185

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR

SNOW CHAINSSnow chains should only be applied to thedrive wheels (front).

Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.

Before purchasing or using snow chains,
you are recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.

Use snow chains with reduced size withmaximum protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.

Snow chains may not be
used on tyres type 225/45
ZR 17”, 235/35 R18”.
Only spider type chains can be usedon tyres type 215/45 R17” and215/45 ZR17”. SPIKES SPIDERCOMPACT snow chains (17003
compact model) with 9 arms and 16
mm adjustable length and 17"
wheel cover adapter are available
at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo. Keepyour speed down when this type ofchains is fitted. Do not exceed 50
km/h with this type of chains,
avoid sudden acceleration and deactivate the ASR system (the warning light on the button shall be on).
Remember that snow chains makebraking distance longer.

Check the tension of the chain after the
first few metres have been driven.

Keep you speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements toprevent damaging the tyres, suspension and steering.

If the vehicle is to be left inactive for long
periods, the following precautions should be
noted:– House the vehicle under cover in a dry
and possibly ventilated place.
– Engage a gear.
– Check that the handbrake is not engaged.
– Clean and protect the paintwork by protective wax.
– Cover the rubber windscreen andrearscreen wiper blades with talcum powder
and raise them off the glass.
– Open the windows slightly.
– Inflate the tyres to a pressure of 0.5 bars
above normal. If possible rest the tyres onwooden planks and periodically check thepressure.
– Do not turn on the electronic alarm system.

186

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLEINACTIVITY

– Do not empty the engine cooling system.
– Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated plastic cover. Do not use compact
plastic covers which prevent the humidity on
the surface of the vehicle from evaporating.

– Check the air cleaner and change it ifnecessary.

USEFUL ACCESSORIES– Check the tyre pressure and the tyres
for signs of damage, cuts or cracks. In thiscase they need to be changed.

Independently of current regulations, wesuggest you keep the following on board(fig. 2):– Check the conditions of the engine belts.

– first aid kit containing non-alcoholic disinfectant, sterile gauzes, gauze roll, plasters, etc.;– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–) after checking the battery charge.
– With the gears in neutral, start the engine and let it idle a few minutes, pressing
the clutch pedal repeatedly.

– electric torch;– rounded scissors;

CORRECT USE OF THE CAR– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–) from the battery and check the battery charge. This check should be repeatedonce a month during stowage. Charge thebattery if the loadless voltage is below
12.5V.

– work gloves.

USING AGAIN
Before using the car again after a prolonged period of inactivity, the following operations are recommended:– Do not dust the outside of the car.
– Check for leaks of fluids (oil, brake andclutch fluid, engine coolant fluid, etc.).
– Change the engine oil and filter.
– Check the level of brake and clutch fluid engine coolant fluid.

A0A0148m

WARNING
This operation must be carried out in the open.
Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which highly toxic andlethal.

fig. 2

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

187

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN AN EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
STARTING

3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The U warning light will
come on for eight seconds and then go off,
now release the accelerator pedal.

If it is not possible to deactivate the engine
inhibitor with the Alfa Romeo CODE system,
the Y and U warning lights stay on andthe engine will not start. Emergency starting is needed to start the engine.

4) The U warning light begins to flash:after it has flashed the same number oftimes as the first digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep it
pressed until the U warning light turns on(for four seconds) and then goes off, now
release the accelerator pedal.

IMPORTANT You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out.
If a mistake is made during the emergency
procedure, the ignition key should be turned
to STOP and the operations must be repeated from the start (point 1).
1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on the
CODE card.
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

5) The U warning light starts to flash: after the number of flashes corresponding to
the second digit on the CODE card, press theaccelerator pedal and keep it pressed.
6) Repeat this procedure for the remaining digits on the CODE card.
7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The U warning light turns on (for four seconds) andthen goes off; now release the accelerator pedal.

188

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

8) A quick flash of the U warning light(for about 4 seconds) confirms that the operation has been carried out correctly.
9) Start the engine turning the ignition key
from MAR to AVV without returning the
key to the STOP position.
Conversely, if the U warning light stays
on, turn the key to STOP and repeat theprocedure starting from point 1).
IMPORTANT After emergency starting
it is advisable to contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service, because the emergency
procedure must be repeated each time theengine is started.

If the battery is flat, (for battery with optical hydrometer: dark colour without green
area in the centre), it is possible to start theengine using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than the flatone.
Proceed as follows (fig. 1):
1) Remove the protective cover on the positive battery post, pressing on the opening
catches (front), then connect the positive
terminals (+ sign next to the terminal) of
the two batteries using a special cable.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: any
sparks may ignite the detonating gas which
could come out of the battery. If the auxiliary battery is installed on another car, avoid
metal parts touching accidentally between
this car and the one with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine has started, remove
the cables, reversing the sequence followed
for connection.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

WARNING
This starting proceduremust be carried out by
qualified personnel because incorrect operations may cause electrical discharge of considerable intensity. The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin andeyes. Keep naked flames and lighted cigarettes away from the battery and do not cause sparks.

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING
WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY

Never use a battery
charger to start the engine
as this could damage theelectronic systems of your vehicle,
particularly the ignition and fuelsupply control units.

2) Connect the end of the second jumplead to the negative terminal (–) of theauxiliary battery with an earth point E on
the engine or gearbox of the vehicle to be
started.
A0A0492m

189

fig. 1

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

STARTING BY INERTIA

IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE

Never push, tow or coast
start the vehicle. This could
cause fuel to flow into thecatalyst damaging it irreversibly.

IMPORTANT The car is equipped with“Kit for tyre quick repair Fix&Go“, see theinstructions contained in the following chapter.

WARNING
Remember that the engine
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
is started, therefore, much greater
effort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING
Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle according
to the current regulations: hazard
warning lights, reflecting triangle,
etc. Any passengers should leave
the car.

190

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Should the type of wheels
used be changed (alloyrims instead of steel), it is also necessary to replace the complete kitof fastening bolts with others ofsuitable size.

The quick repairing kit is placed in the bootinside the appropriate container (A-fig. 11).

The car is equipped with a tyre quick repairing kit called FIX&GO.

– a compressor (B) with pressure gauge
and fittings;

The quick repairing kit includes (fig. 12):
– a tool (A) to remove the valve body;– a bottle (C) containing sealer and fitted with a filling pipe;

IMPORTANT In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fix
tyres having cracks with maximum diameter up to 4 mm.
In (fig. 13) it is possible to identify:
A - tyre area which can be fixed (holes
or cracks with diameter of max 4 mm);B - areas which CANNOT be fixed.

– a “spout” (D) to be connected to thefilling pipe;

WARNING
Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle according to the current regulations: hazard warning lights, reflecting triangle, etc.

A0A0375m

fig. 12

fig. 13

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0376m– a sticker bearing the notice “max 80km/h”, to be placed in a position visible
to the driver (on the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre.

A0A0374m

fig. 11IN AN EMERGENCY

FIX&GO KIT FOR
QUICK TYREREPAIRING191

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
It is not possible to fix
cracks on the tyre sides
and permanent sealing of cracks on
the tread within 25 mm from thetyre side is not guaranteed.

WARNING
Do not use the quick repairing kit if the tyre isdamaged due to driving with thewheel flattened. That it is why it
is necessary to check accurately thetyre sides.

WARNING
In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deformation
is such that there is an air leakage)or the tyre outside the limit areas
previously indicated, fixing is notpossible. Do not remove foreign
bodies (screws or nails) which havepenetrated the tyre.

WARNING
Warning! The bottle (C-fig.
12) contains propylene glycol. This substance is toxic: do not
swallow it and avoid contact withthe eyes, the skin and the clothes.
In case of contact, rinse with abundant water. If any allergy reaction
should take place call a medical doctor. Keep the bottle cylinder in theappropriate compartment awayfrom heat and children.

192

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IT IS NECESSARYTO KNOW THAT:WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for more than 20
minutes: risk of overheating!

The sealer included in the quick repairing
kit, good for temperatures between –30°C
e +80°C, is not adequate for permanent fixing.
The liquid inside the tyre can be easily removed with water.
The sealer has no expire date.

– Place the wheel in the position illustrated
in the figure (A-fig. 14) for the operation
with the valve, then engage the handbrake.
– Screw the filling pipe (B-fig. 15) tothe bottle (C).
– Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove theelement inside the valve by using the appropriate tool (D-fig. 16); be careful not
to place it on the sand or on a dirty surface.
– Introduce the filling pipe (B-fig. 17)
in the tyre valve, keep the bottle (C) withthe pipe directed downwards, then press thebottle so that the whole sealer can get into
the tyre.

– Screw again the element inside thevalve with the tool (D-fig. 18).
– Use the appropriate lever (E-fig. 19)
to insert and clamp the air compressor pipe(F) to the tyre valve.
– Start the engine, insert the plug (Gfig. 20) in the lighter (or current socket,
where fitted) and inflate the tyre according
to the right pressure value (see “Cold inflation pressures” in the “Technical specification”). You are advised to check the tyrepressure value on the pressure gauge (Hfig. 19) with the compressor off, in orderto have a more accurate reading.

A0A0447m

fig. 14

If, in spite of the last operation, the prescribed pressure is not achieved, do not
move the vehicle and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately so thatthe sealer is distributed evenly inside thetyre.

A0A0378m

fig. 15

A0A0448m

fig. 16

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If it is not possible to reach the prescribedpressure, move the car forwards or backwards for about 10 metres, so that the sealer is distributed inside the tyre, then repeat
inflation.

IN AN EMERGENCY

INFLATING PROCEDURE

193

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
Place the sticker in a position where it can be clearly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treated with
the quick repairing kit. Drive carefully especially in a bend. Do not
overcome 80 km/h. Avoid sudden
acceleration or braking.

After about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember toengage the handbrake.

WARNING
If the pressure is below
1,3 bars do not drive any
further: the quick repairing kit cannot guarantee proper hold because
the tyre is too much damaged. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Conversely, if at least 1,3 bars aredetected, restore the correct pressure (with the engine running andthe handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car with great care.

A0A0449m

194 fig. 17

A0A0450m

fig. 18

A0A0451m

fig. 19

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNINGIf, during the pressure
restoring operation, it is
not possible to reach at least 1,8
bars, do not drive any further because the tyre is too much damaged and the quick repairing kit
cannot guarantee proper hold. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to check the tyre conditions, then have it fixed or replaced.

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULBWARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking account of the system specifications may cause failures and therisk of fire.

It is absolutely necessary to communicatethat the tyre has been fixed with the quick
repairing kit.

A0A0491m

WARNING
Where possible, it is advisable to have bulbs
changed c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The correct operation and aiming of the outer lights
are vital to the safety of the vehicle and its passengers and thesubject of specific laws.

WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas, in the case of
breakage they may burst.

195

fig. 20

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only themetallic part. If the transparent
bulb is touched with the fingers, its
lighting intensity is reduced and thelife of the bulb may be compromised. If touched accidentally, rub
the bulb with a cloth moistenedwith methylated spirit and allow
to dry.

IN AN EMERGENCYWARNING
Tyres fixed with the quick
repairing kit must be used
only temporarily.

IN AN EMERGENCY

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSTYPES OF BULBS (fig. 21)– When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb.

Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle:– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”
in this chapter.

A.

All glass bulbs
These are pressed on. Pull to remove.

B.

Bayonet type bulbs
Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise
to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.

C.

Tubular bulbs
Free them from their contacts to remove.

– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power.
– Always check headlight aiming after
changing a bulb to ensure they are safe.

196

A0A0453m

fig. 21

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

D.-E. Halogen bulbs
To remove, free it from the clip on
its housing.

FIGURE 21

TYPE

POWER

High beam

D

H7

55W

Low beam

D

H7

55W

Front sidelights

B

H6W

6W

Foglight

E

H1

55W

Front direction indicators

B

H21W

21W

Side direction indicators

A

W5W

5W

Rear direction indicators

B

P21W

21W

Rear sidelights - braking lights

B

P21/5W

5W/21W

Third stop (additional braking lights)

A

W2.3W

2.3W

Reversing light

B

P21W

21W

Rear fog guards

B

P21W

21W

Number plate light

A

W5W

5W

Puddle lights

C

C5W

5W

Front roof light

C

C10W

10W

Rear roof light

C

C10W

10W

Courtesy mirror light

A

W1.2W

1.2W

Glovebox light

A

W5W

5W

Boot light

C

C5W

5W

IN AN EMERGENCY

BULBS

197

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUTXENON LIGHTS
Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.

The front light units contain the front sidelight, dipped beam, main beam and fog
light bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 22a):(A) Main beam headlights

To change the bulbs of the sidelights,
dipped beams and main beams it is necessary to remove the cover (A-fig. 22b)
releasing the locking screws (B).
To change the fog lights, remove the cover (C) turning it counter-clockwise.

(B) Sidelights(C) Xenon dipped beam headlights

WARNINGIf necessary, have the system checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.

(D) Fog lights.
After replacement, refit
the covers correctly checking that they are properly
secured.

Hereafter you will find, as information only, the description of the correct procedure
to replace a Xenon light.

198

A0A0504m

A0A0498m

WARNINGAny operation regarding
the front light units shall be
carried out with the lights turned
off and the ignition key removed
from the ignition switch: risk ofelectric discharges.
fig. 22afig. 22b

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT When needing to change
the left bulb, the side trim next to the lightitself needs to be removed to facilitate access to the engine compartment.

Xenon dipped beam
headlights (fig. 23b)

Front sidelights (fig. 24a)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the locking screws.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the locking screws.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A)turning it slightly counter-clockwise.

– Using the extension (A), integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulb holder itself which is snap-fitted.

– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Remove ring nut (B) turning it slightly
counter-clockwise– Remove the bulb (C), pushing it gently and turning it counter-clockwise.

– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Fit a new bulb correctly observing thegrooves on the lamp lens, then refit the ringnut (B).

– Change the bulb and refit the bulb holder making sure that it clicks into place; also check that the bulb is in the correct position looking at the lamp from outside.

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover turning it
counter-clockwise.

– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).

– Reconnect the electric connector (A).

IN AN EMERGENCY

Front fog lights (fig. 23a)

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Reconnect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
A0A0499m

fig. 23a

A0A0500m

fig. 23b

fig. 24a

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0501m

199

IN AN EMERGENCY

Main beam headlights(fig. 24b)

HALOGEN LIGHTS

The front light units contain the dipped
beam, main beam and fog light bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 25a):

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the locking screws.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves on
the reflector, then hook the bulb holder
catch (B).
– Reconnect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

(A) Fog lights.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking account of the system specifications may cause failures and therisk of fire.
IMPORTANT See the previous chapter “When needing to change a bulb” forthe type of bulb and power rating.

A0A0502m

200 fig. 24b(C) Sidelights.
(D) Main beam headlights
To change the bulbs of the sidelights, lowbeams and main beams it is necessary to
remove the cover (A-fig. 25b) releasing
the catches (B).
To change the fog lights, remove the cover (C) turning counter-clockwise.

A0A0159m

fig. 25a

A0A0160m

fig. 25b

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine(B) Dipped beam headlights

Fog lights (fig. 26a)
IMPORTANT When needing to change
the left bulb, the side trim next to the lightitself needs to be removed to facilitate access to the engine compartment.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect, since it is a natural occurrence due to
low temperature and to the degree of humidity in the air; it will soon disappear assoon as the lights are turned on. The presence of drops inside the headlight showswater seepage, refer to the Alfa Romeo
Dealership.

Dipped beam headlights(fig. 26b)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Remove the protective cover turning
counter-clockwise.

– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Disconnect the electric connector (A).

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Fit a new bulb, Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of the metallic part coincidewith the grooves on the reflector, then hookthe bulb holder catch (B).

– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
A0A0161m

fig. 26a

A0A0162m

fig. 26b

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

After replacement, refit
the covers correctly checking that they are properly
secured.

201

IN AN EMERGENCY

Front side lights (fig. 27a)
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches– Using the extension (A) integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulb holder itself which is snap-fitted.

Main-beam headlights(fig. 27b)

FRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORS (fig. 28-29)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Remove the protective cover releasing
the catches.

– Work in the point shown by the arrowin order to compress the internal clip (A),then remove the lens. To do this use the flatbladed screwdriver provided, protect the tip
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the car.

– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).

– Remove the bulb (C), pushing gently
and turning counter-clockwise.

– Remove the bulb and replace it.

– Change the bulb and re-insert the bulb
holder making sure that it clicks into place;also check that the bulb is in the correct position looking at the lamp from outside.

– Fit a new bulb, Fit a new bulb, making the tabs of the metallic part coincidewith the grooves on the reflector, then hookthe bulb holder catch (B).

– Refit the corrective cover correctly.

– Re-connect the electric connector (A).

– Turn the bulb holder (B) clockwise andremove it from the lens unit.

– Refit the protective cover correctly.

A0A0342m

202 fig. 27a

A0A0164m

fig. 27bfig. 28

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0454m

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 30)

– Replace the bulb.

– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the catch (A).
Release the front part and remove this unit.

– Refit the bulb holder turning clockwise
and checking that it is secured correctly.

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(B) and remove it from the cover.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replaceit.
– Insert the bulb holder (B) in the transparent cover, then position the unit making sure the catch clicks into place (A).

A0A0455m

fig. 29

The reversing light and rear fog guard arein the tail light unit fastened to the tailgate;
they are to be found respectively one on theright and the other on the left of the vehicle
facing forwards.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the cap (A) then, using the extension with the screwdriver provided (working as illustrated), loosen the fastening nuts(B) of the light unit concerned.

A0A0166m

fig. 30

A0A0167m

fig. 31

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

REVERSING LIGHTSAND REAR FOG GUARDS(fig. 31-32)

IN AN EMERGENCY– Remove the bulb pushing it gently andturning it counter-clockwise.

203

IN AN EMERGENCY– Withdraw the light unit outwards.
– Slacken the electric connector (C).
– Slacken the screws (D), and remove
the bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb pushing gently andturning counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulb
holder and tighten the screws (D).
– Re-tighten the electric connector (C).
– Refit the light unit on the tailgate tightening the nuts (B) then refit the cap (A)pressing it on.

REAR DIRECTION INDICATORSREAR SIDELIGHTS-BRAKING
LIGHT (fig. 33-34)
The rear direction indicators and the side
light-braking light are in the tail light unit fastened to the body.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:– From inside the boot, open the preformed trim (A) then, using the extension
and the screwdriver provided (working as illustrated) slacken the nuts (B) fastening
the light unit.
– Withdraw the light unit outwards.

– Disconnect the electric connector (C).
– Slacken the screw (D), and remove thebulb holder.
– Remove the bulb to be changed pushing gently and turning counter-clockwise:(E) - bulb for rear sidelight-braking light.
(F) - bulb for rear direction indicators.
– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulb
holder and tighten the screw (D).
– Re-connect the electric connector (C).
– Refit the light unit on the body tightening the screws (B).
– Close the preformed trim (A).

A0A0168m

204 fig. 33

A0A0169m

fig. 34

fig. 35

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0170m

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT(THIRD STOP) (fig. 36-37)– Insert the bulb holder making sure thecatches click into place (E).

To change the bulbs proceed as follows:

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:– Work on the transparent cover frame,in the point shown by the arrow to compress
the catch (B). Free the opposite end and remove the unit.

– Open the tailgate, slacken the screws(A) then disconnect the electric connector(B).

– Refit the transparent cover-bulb holder(C) in the support (D).

– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A) and remove it from the transparent cover.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replaceit.

– Remove the transparent cover-bulb holder (C) from the support (D).

– Re-connect the electric connector (B).
– Refit the unit on the tailgate tightening
the screws (A).

IN AN EMERGENCYNUMBER PLATE LIGHTS(fig. 35)

– Working on the side catches (E), remove the bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb to be changed.

– Insert the bulb holder (A) in the transparent cover then refit the unit checking thatthe catch clicks into place (B).

A0A0171m

fig. 35

A0A0172m

fig. 36

fig. 37

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0173m

205

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUTPUDDLE LIGHT (fig. 38)(for versions/markets
where applicable)– Close the protective cover (B).
– Refit the light unit pressing gently in correspondence with the retainer catches, until hearing the click.

To change the bulb proceed as follows:– Open the door and slacken the screw(A) fastening the transparent covers.

FRONT ROOF LIGHT(fig. 39-40)– Remove the unit composed of the twotransparent covers then change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts making surethat the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts.

To change the bulbs proceed as follows:– Realign the two transparent covers andtighten the fastening screw (A).

– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the points shown by the arrow (in correspondence with the retainer catches).
– Open the protective cover (B).
– Replace the bulb concerned releasing itfrom the side contacts making sure that the
new bulb is correctly clamped between thecontacts.

A0A0174m

206 fig. 38

A0A0175m

fig. 39

fig. 40

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0176m

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT(fig. 43-44)– Put the bulb holder correctly (C) backin its housing.

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

To change a bulb proceed as follows:– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the point shown by the arrow.

– Open the mirror cover (A).

– Refit the transparent cover (B) inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end
and then on the other until it clicks into
place.

– Replace the bulb releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the new bulb
is correctly clamped between the contacts.
– Refit the light unit in the correct position
inserting first the side with the connector,
then pressing the other side until the catchclicks into place (B).

– Remove the transparent cover (B) levering in the point shown by the arrow.
– Gently raise the bulb holder (C) from its
housing, remove the snap-fitted bulb andchange it.

IN AN EMERGENCY

REAR ROOF LIGHT(fig. 41-42)

A0A0179m

fig. 43
A0A0177m

fig. 41

A0A0178m

fig. 42

fig. 44

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0180m

207

IN AN EMERGENCYGLOVEBOX LIGHT (fig. 45-46)

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47-48)– Close the protective cover again (B).

To change the bulb proceed as follows:

To change the bulb proceed as follows:– Open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit (A) levering in the point shown by
the arrow.

– Open the tailgate.

– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into plac.

– Open the protection (B) and change thesnap-fitted bulb.
– Close the protection (B) on the transparent cover.

– Remove the light unit (A) levering in
the point shown by the arrow.
– Open the protective cover (B) and replace the bulb releasing it from the side contacts, making sure that the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts.

A0A0183m– Refit the light unit inserting it in its correct position firstly on one end and then on
the other until it clicks into plac.

fig. 47
A0A0181m

208 fig. 45

A0A0182m

fig. 46

fig. 48

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0184m

GENERAL(B) - Undamaged fuse

The fuse is a protective device for the electric system: it comes into action (i.e. it cutsoff) mainly due to a fault or improper action
on the system.

(C) - Fuse with damaged filament.

When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor element(A-fig. 49) must be intact; if not, replace
the fuse with one of the same amp rating(same colour).

Remove the blown fuse using the pincer provided (D), in the control box.

WARNING
If a general fuse (MAXIFUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cutsin, do not attempt any repair andcontact an Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service.

Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.

WARNING
Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that all theother services are switched off
and/or disengaged.

WARNING
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE.

WARNING
If a fuse blows again, contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE

A0A0185m

209

fig. 49

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

The fuses of the Alfa 147 GTA aregrouped in three control boxes, to be foundrespectively on the dashboard, on the battery
positive pole and next to the actual battery.
Access is gained to the control box on thedashboard by slackening the two retainers(A-fig. 50) and removing the protective
trim (B).
To access the fuses in the control unit on
the battery pole, it is necessary operate in
the direction shown by the arrows on theblocking devices (A-fig. 51) and thenopen the 2 covers (B).
To access the fuses of the control unit located near the battery, it is necessary to operate in the opposite way on the retaining
devices (C), and then remove cover (D).
To locate the protection fuses, consulting
the summary table on the following pages,
refer to the following illustrations fig. 52,
fig. 53 and 54.

A0A0493m

fig. 51

A0A0134m

A0A0186m

210 fig. 50

fig. 52 - Control box on dashboard

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0495m

IN AN EMERGENCY

A0A0494m

fig. 53 - Control box next to battery

fig. 54 - Control box on battery positive pole

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

211

IN AN EMERGENCYFUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTSFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Hazard warning light

52

F53

10

Right dipped-beam headlight

52

F12

10

Left dipped-beam headlight

52

F13

10

Main-beam headlight

53

F2

15

Foglight

53

F30

15

Braking light

52

F37

10

Reversing light

52

F35

7.5

+30 direction indicators

52

F53

10

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERESSERVICES
Selespeed transmission pump

54

Ignition switch

54

IGN (MAXI-FUSE)

30

Headlight aiming device

52

F13

10

Climate control system

52

F31

7.5

Climate control system

52

F39

15

Climate control compressor

53

F1

7.5

Heater unit relay coils

52

F31

7.5

212

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

30

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Key-operated +30

52

F32

15

Selespeed transmission

53

F11

7.5

Selespeed transmission

52

F51

7.5

Radio

52

F39

15

Navigator

52

F39

15

Rearscreen wiper

52

F52

15

Left rear power window

52

F33

20

Right rear power window

52

F34

20

Rearscreen heating

52

F40

30

Windscreen - rearscreen washer (two-way pump)

52

F43

30

Cigar lighter

52

F44

20

Seats with electric heating

52

F45

15

Heated wing mirrors - heated nozzles

52

F41

7.5

Cruise control

52

F35

7.5

Central door locking

52

F38

20

Headlight washer

53

F5

20

Services + 30

52

F39

15

Primary services (electronic injection)

53

F8

7.5

Secondary services (electronic injection)

53

F9

15

Secondary services

52

F49

7.5

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES

213

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICESFIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Volumetric sensors

52

F39

15

VDC system sensor

52

F42

7.5

Steering angle sensor

52

F42

7.5

EOBD system diagnosis socket

52

F39

15

Cell phone provision

52

F39

15

Driver’s door control unit supply

52

F47

20

Passenger’s door control unit supply

52

F48

20

Controls lighting

52

F49

7.5

Climate control system controls lighting

52

F35

7.5

Instrument cluster

52

F37

10

Instrument cluster

52

F53

10

Driver’s door control unit

52

F39

15

ABS control unit

52

F42

7.5

ABS control unit54

ABS (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Dashboard control box

54

CPL2 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

Boot control unit

52

F39

15

Air - bag control unit

52

F50

7.5

Electronic injection control unit +30

53

F6

7.5

Dashboard control unit

54

CPL1 (MAXI-FUSE)

70

214

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FIGUREFUSE

AMPERES

Climate control fan

54

A/C (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan

54

FAN1 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Radiator fan

54

FAN2 (MAXI-FUSE)

40

Horn

53

F3

15

Fuel pump

53

F4

15

Tailgate electric unlocking

52

F60 (*)

25

Electronic injection system

53

F11

7.5

Bose system

52

F61 (*)

15

Bose system

52

F62 (*)

15

Sunroof52

F63 (*)

20

Sun roof

52

F46

15

Petrol/ignition coil injectors

53

F10

15

Services

53

F12

7.5

Electronic injection

54

EFI (MAXI-FUSE)

30Engine compartment fuse carrier module54

JB3 (MAXI-FUSE)

50

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICES(*) Fuse behind dashboard control box on an auxiliary bracket.

215

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY
Before anything else, you are advised toread the precautions for preventing the battery from draining and for ensuring long lifein the “Vehicle maintenance” chapter.
CHARGING THE BATTERYIMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for 24 hours. Charging for a longer time
may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

See “Starting with an auxiliary battery” inthis chapter.

– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

WARNINGThe liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated place,away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of
explosion and fire.

216

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

STARTING WITH AN
AUXILIARY BATTERYWARNING
Do not attempt to charge afrozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it
may burst. If freezing has occurred,
the battery should be checked byskilled personnel to make sure thatthe internal elements are not damaged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leaking
poisonous and corrosive acid.

Strictly avoid using a battery charger to start theengine: you may damage
the electronic systems, in particular the ignition and fuel supply control units.

The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.
Front towing

Back towing
To install the tow ring, just screw the ringfirmly in its housing (fig. 56).

To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on
the front bumper (fig. 55). To do this use
the flat-bladed screwdriver provided, protect
the tip with a soft cloth to avoid damaging
the car.
– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.

WARNING
Before tightening the ring
carefully clean the threaded housing. Before beginning to
tow the car, make sure that thering is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.

A0A0456m

fig. 55

A0A0457m

217

fig. 56

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the car. Before
starting to tow, turn the ignition key
to MAR and back to STOP again
without removing it. Removing the
key automatically engages thesteering lock resulting in the impossibility to steer the wheels. When
towing remember that without thehelp of the engine brake and power steering greater effort is requiredon the pedal and steering wheel. Do
not use flexible cables for towing
and avoid jerks. During towing operations make sure that fastening
the joint to the car does not damage
the components in contact with it.
When towing the car, it is compulsory to follow specific traffic regulations concerning both the towing
device and behaviour on the road.

IN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWEDIN AN EMERGENCYIF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTEDUSING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
The vehicle should be lifted only at the side
setting the ends of the arms or the workshop lift in the area shown in fig. 57.

Take care when positioning the arms of the lift orworkshop lift to avoid
damaging the side strips.

A0A0458m

218

fig. 57

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved, stop at
least a few dozen metres away from the accident.
– On motorways, stop without blocking
the emergency lane.
– Turn the engine off and the hazard warning lights on.
– At night, illuminate the place of the accident with the headlights.
– Take care, do not risk being run over.

– Signal the accident placing the triangle
at regulation distance in a clearly visible
place.

– If you note a smell of fuel or other chemical products, do not smoke and have cigarettes stubbed out.

– Call the emergency organisation, giving
the most accurate information possible. On
motorways use the special phones provided.
– In motorway pileups, especially withpoor visibility, the risk of being involved inother crashes is high. Leave the car immediately and go beyond the guard-rail.

– To put out fires, even small ones, use
the extinguisher, blankets, sand, or earth.
Never use water.
– If use of the lighting system is not necessary, disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).

IN AN EMERGENCY

IN THE EVENT
OF AN ACCIDENT– If the doors are blocked, do not try to
get out of the car breaking the windscreen
which is stratified. The windows and rear
screen are easier to break.
– Remove the ignition key of the vehicles involved.

219

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IN AN EMERGENCY

IF PEOPLE ARE INJUREDFIRST AID KIT– An injured person must never be abandoned. Helping is compulsory also for persons not directly involved in the accident.

It is advisable to have also a fire extinguisher and a blanket besides the first-aid
kit.

– Do not crowd around injured people.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on the way, and stay near to overcome
any panic.
– Release or cut the seat belt restraining
injured persons.
– Do not give injured persons anything
to drink.
– An injured person should never be
moved except in the following circumstances.
– Remove an injured person from the car
only in danger of fire, sinking or falling.
When removing an injured person: do notpull the limbs or bend the head and keep
the body as horizontal as possible.

220

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SCHEDULEDSERVICING
Correct maintenance is determinate in ensuring long vehicle life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
IMPORTANT On versions fitted with reconfigurable multifunction display, at 2000
km from the maintenance deadline, the display will show “REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL” which is shown again turning the ignition key to MAR, every 200 km. For further details, see “Service” in the “Reconfigurable multifunction display” paragraph.

It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before the 20,000 km service coupon and later, between one coupon
and another, ordinary care is still necessary
such as for example routinely checking andtopping up the level of fluids, checking thetyre pressure, etc...

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, at pre-established times.

221

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCESCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
Thousands of km

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen washer system, adjust spray jets

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of front disk brake pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check wear conditions of rear disk brake pads

●

●

●

Sight check the conditions of: body exterior, underbody protection, stiff pipes andhoses (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts (boots - sleeves - bushes etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight check for accessory poly-V drive belt●

Check handbrake lever stroke adjustment

●
●

●

●

●

Check antievaporation system●

Change air cleaner cartridge

●

●

●

●

Top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc..)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and if necessary top up the Selespeed automatic transmission oil level

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sight check for conditions of timing gear drive toothed belt

222

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

●

20

40

60

80

100

120

Change timing gear drive belt (*)●

Change accessory Poly-V drive belt●●

Change spark plugs●

Check operation of engine control system (through diagnosis socket)

140

●
●

180

●

●

●

●

Check mechanical transmission and differential oil level

160●

Change engine oil

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change engine oil filter

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)
Change pollen filer (or once a year)●●●

Check emissions/smoke at the exhaust

●

●
●
●

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Thousands of km

●

●
●

●
●

●

●

●

(*) Or every 3 years for harsh conditions (cold climates, city driving or prolonged lengths of time at idle speed, dusty areas)
Or every 5 years, regardless of mileage.

223

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

ANNUAL INSPECTION
PROGRAMMEFor cars with an annual mileageof below 20,000 km (for example
about 10,000 km) the following
yearly inspection programme is advised:– Check tyre conditions/wear and if necessary adjust the pressure– Check operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights )– Check operation of windscreen wiper
system, spray jet adjustment– Sight check for conditions of: engine,
gearbox, transmission, pipes (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes) rubber parts (boots sleeves - bushes etc..), brake and fuel supply system hoses– Check battery charge

Every 1000 km or before long journeys,
check and if necessary top up:– Sight check for conditions of various drive belts– engine coolant fluid level– Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen
washer, battery, etc...)– power steering fluid level– Change engine oil– Change engine oil filter– Change pollen filter.

– brake/hydraulic clutch control fluid level– windscreen/rearscreen and headlamp
washer fluid level– tyre pressure and conditions.
Every 3000 km check and if necessary
top up the engine oil level.
The use of products of the FL Selenia is
recommended which have been designed
and made expressly for Alfa Romeo cars(see “Refuelling” in the “Technical Specifications” chapter).

– Check position/wear of windscreen/
rearscreen wiper blades– Check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear– Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

224

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ADDITIONALOPERATIONSIMPORTANT
Battery

IMPORTANT
Pollen filter

Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:

It is advisable to check the battery charge,
preferably at the onset of winter, to preventthe possibility of the electrolyte freezing.

– trailer or caravan towing

This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used mainly for shorttrips, or if it is fitted with accessories thatpermanently absorb electricity even with theignition key removed, especially in the caseof after market accessories.

If the vehicle is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced
if a reduction of the amount of air admitted
to the passenger compartment is noted.

– dusty roads– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving or in case of a long term
inactivity– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero replace engine oil more frequently than required on Service Schedule.

If the vehicle is used in hot climates or particularly harsh conditions it is wise to checkthe level of the battery fluid (electrolyte)
more frequently than specified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

IMPORTANTAir cleaner
Using the car on dusty roads change theair cleaner more frequently than specified in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANTEngine oil

Vehicle maintenance should
be entrusted to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services. For
routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out yourself, always make sure you have theproper equipment, genuine Alfa
Romeo spares and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out these
operations if you have no experience.

For any doubts concerning the intervals between engine oil and air cleaner replacement
in relation to how the vehicle is used, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

225

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

A0A0405m

CHECKING LEVELSWARNING
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammable vapours
may be present, with the risk offire.

When topping up takecare not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage
the vehicle.

fig. 1
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Power steering fluid - 5 Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp washer fluid - 6 Engine coolant fluid

226

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The engine oil should be checked with thevehicle on a level surface a few minutes(about 5) after the engine has beenswitched off.
Remove the dipstick (A) clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and check thatthe level is within the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick. The interval between
the MIN and MAX marks corresponds toabout one litre of oil.

WARNING
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.

Do not add oil with specifications (classification,
viscosity) other than thoseof the oil already in the engine.

Engine oil consumption
Max engine oil consumption is usually 400
grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore engine oil consumption
may be considered stabilised only after the
first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filler neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.
IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals
that the level is above the MAX mark, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to havethe correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After topping up the oil,
before checking the level again, run the engine a few seconds and wait for a few minutes after stopping it.

IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the vehicle.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL (fig. 3)

Used engine oil and filter
contain harmful substances
for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services, to have the oil and filter
changed as they are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting nature and the law.

A0A0406m

227

fig. 3

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCESELESPEED TRANSMISSION
OIL (fig. 4)– if the oil is below the MAX mark, top
up to reach the correct level;

The Selespeed transmission oil should bechecked with the vehicle on a level surface
and with the engine stopped and cold.

– after refitting the cap, insert the breather
tube firmly on the housing on the cap andturn the ignition key to STOP.

To check the level, proceed as follows:– turn the ignition key to MAR;– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick integrated with the cap;

Used gearbox oil contains
dangerous substances forthe environment. For changing the oil we advise contacting Alfa Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposing of used
oil respecting nature and the law.

A0A00197m

228 fig. 4

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Be very careful working inside the engine compartment if the engine is hot: danger ofburns. Remember that the fan may
cut in if the engine is very hot: danger of injury.

Do not add oil with specifications other than that
already in the gearbox.

WARNING
Do not remove the cap
when the engine is hot:danger of burns.
The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank.
If the level is low, loosen the header tankcap (A) and slowly pour a mixture of thefluid specified in the ”Fluids and lubricants”
table in section “Technical Specifications”,
through the filler neck until nearing the
MAX mark; have this operation carried out
at Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
A0A0240m

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only withanother genuine one, otherwise
system efficiency could be compromised.

Check that the level of the oil in the reservoir is at maximum.
This operation should be carried out withthe vehicle on a level surface and the engine switched off and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX
mark on the reservoir or coincides with theupper notch (maximum level) on the dipstick (A) integral with the reservoir cap.

Top up only with the same
fluid contained in the cooling circuit. PARAFLU UP(red) cannot be mixed with
PARAFLU 11 (blue) or with otherfluids. Should this take place, do
not start the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.

fig. 5

A0A0407m

fig. 6

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

POWER STEERING FLUID(fig. 6)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection down
to –40°C.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID(fig. 5)229

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

If the oil level in the reservoir is below thespecified one, top up only with one of the
products listed in the “Fluids and lubricants”
table in the “Technical Specifications” chapter proceeding as follows.
– Start the engine and wait for the oil level in the reservoir to stabilise.

WARNING
Do not allow the power
steering fluid to touch hotparts of the engine: it is inflammable.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 7)

Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

When loosening thereservoir cap do not allow
the fluid to come into contact with painted parts. If it does,
wash it off immediately with water.

Slacken the cap (A) and check that thefluid contained in the reservoir reaches the
maximum mark.

– With the engine running, turn the steering wheel lock to lock a few times.
– Top up to the MAX level notch, thenrefit the cap.

A0A0408m

230

fig. 7

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
The π symbol on the container indicates synthetic
brake fluid, distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral fluids irreversibly damages the special braking system rubber seals.

WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN/
HEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID(fig. 8)Open the cap (A) and check the level inthe reservoir.
If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC
35 fluid as follows:– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;– in the case of temperatures below -20°C
use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
fluid neat.

A0A0242m

IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.

WARNING
Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reservoir empty: the action of the windscreen washer is fundamental for
improving vision.

To avoid damaging thepump motor, do not use
the windscreen/rearscreen
washers when the reservoir isempty.

231

fig. 8Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Some commercial additives
for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine compartment contains hot components
which may set it on fire.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCEWARNING
Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, wash the parts concerned
immediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swallowed.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

AIR CLEANER
The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send
to the control unit the electric signals needed for correct operation of the injection andignition system.

If the car is habituallyused in dusty areas, thecleaner should be replaced
at shorter intervals than thosespecified in the Programmed Maintenance Schedule.

Any attempt to clean thecleaner may damage it,leading to serious engine
damage.

232

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This has a mechanical/electrostatic air filtering action, provided that the windows anddoors are shut.
Have the dust/pollen filter checked oncea year by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,preferably at the onset of summer.

It must therefore always be in perfect conditions, to ensure correct operation of theengine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.

If the operations concerning cleaner replacement
are not carried out correctly and with the due precautions,they may compromise the travelling safety of the vehicle. You arerecommended to have this operation carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

POLLEN FILTER

If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
IMPORTANT The failure to replace thepollen filter can considerably reduce the effectiveness of the climate control system.

The battery is of the “Limited Maintenance” type and is fitted with an optical indicator (A-fig. 9) for checking the electrolyte level and charge.
Under normal conditions of use the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilledwater. To make sure that it is in efficient conditions, at routine intervals check the indicator on the battery cover which should be dark
in colour with a green central area.
If the indicator is a bright light colour, or
dark without the green central area, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Batteries contain harmful
substances for the environment. To change the battery we advise contacting Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposal respecting nature and the law.

WARNING
When working on the battery or near to it, always
protect the eyes with goggles.

The incorrect installationof electric accessories may
cause serious damage tothe vehicle. If after buying the car
you wish to install accessories(alarm, radio, radiotelephone etc.)
contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services who will be able to suggest the most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.

WARNINGThe liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated placeaway from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of
explosion and fire.

A0A0224m

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

BATTERY

A0A0393m

If the car is to remain inactive for a long time invery cold conditions, remove the battery and take it to awarm place, otherwise it may
freeze.
fig. 9fig. 10

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

233

VEHICLE MAINTENANCEWARNING
Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.

CHARGING THE BATTERYIMPORTANT The battery charging procedure is described only for information purposes. This operation should be carried out
by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

– After charging, turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative terminal (–).

Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for 24 hours. Charging for a longer time
may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
CHECKING THE CHARGE– Disconnect the battery negative terminal (–).

The battery charge may be checked satisfactorily using the indicator, and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.

– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals ensuring that the bias is correct.

Refer to the table below or to the label(fig. 10) on the battery itself.

– Turn on the charger.

Brilliantwhite colour

Top up the electrolyte

Contact Authorised Alfa Romeo
Services

Dark colour without green
area in the centre

Low charge level

Charge the battery(you are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services)

Dark colour with green
area in the centre

Sufficient electrolyte
level and charge

No action

234

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARNING
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery: it mustfirstly be thawed, otherwise it
may burst. If freezing has occurred,
the battery should be checked before charging by specialised personnel, to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged
and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of leaking poisonousand corrosive acid.

IMPORTANT If the battery is kept witha charge of below 50% it is damaged by sulphation, its starting capability is reduced and
it is also more subject to the possibility offreezing (this may occur already at -10 °C).
In the event of prolonged inactivity, referto the paragraph “Vehicle inactivity”, in thechapter “Correct use of the car”.

When changing the battery it should be replaced with another original one with thesame characteristics. If it is replaced by abattery with different characteristics, themaintenance intervals given in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme in this chapter are no longer valid and for maintenanceit will be necessary to follow the battery
Manufacturer’s instructions.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid rapidly draining the battery andensure that it continues to work correctly,
the following should be noted:– The terminals must always be firmly
tightened.
– Within reason, avoid using electrical devices for a long time when the engine isswitched off (radio, hazard warning lights,
parking lights, etc.).

– When the vehicle is parked in a garage,
ensure that the doors, bonnet, boot and inner lids are closed properly so that the lights
do not stay on permanently.
– Before carrying out any work on theelectric system, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
– If after buying the car, you wish to install electric accessories which require a permanent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft function etc.) or accessories that burden the electric system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption,
checking whether the vehicle’s electric system is capable of withstanding the load required, or whether it should be integrated
with a more powerful battery. In fact, assome of these devices continue absorbing
energy even when the ignition key is off (carstationary, engine off), they gradually drain
the battery.

The maximum absorption of all the accessories (standard and fitted afterwards)
should be 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as
shown in the following table:

Battery

Maximum permissible
loadless absorption

60 Ah

36 mA

70 Ah

42 mA

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

CHANGING THE BATTERY

You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption switched on by theuser, such as for example: baby bottle warmers, vacuum cleaner, mobile phone, mini
fridge, etc., quicken the battery draining
process if they are turned on withthe engine off or running at idle speed.
IMPORTANT When installing additional systems on the vehicle, bear in mind that
improper branches on connections of the vehicle wiring are dangerous, particularly ifsafety devices are involved.

235

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITSWith normal use of the vehicle. no particular precautions need to be taken.

– Do not check for current in the cables by
short-circuiting the ends.

WHEELS AND TYRES– If electric welding is to be carried out on
the body, remember to disconnect the electronic control units, or remove them if thework involves high temperatures.

TYRE PRESSURE

In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions given below must absolutely be adhered to:– Always switch off the engine before disconnecting the battery from the electric system.
– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric system.
– When starting in an emergency, only
use an auxiliary battery and not a battery
charger.

The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system carriedout incorrectly and without taking
account of the specifications of thesystem, may cause operating faults
with the risk of fire.

– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.

It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use. Should it become
necessary to restore the pressure with thetyre hot, bear in mind that the pressure
should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see
wheels in the “Technical Specifications”
chapter.

WARNING
Remember that vehicle
road holding also depends
on correct tyre inflation pressure.

– Before disconnecting or connecting theterminals of electronic units, ensure that theignition key is not in the MAR position.

236

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Check the tyre pressure of every wheel, including the spare.

A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.
C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

WARNING
Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of thetyre with the possibility of serious
damage to it.

Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.
A0A0225m

IMPORTANT
Where possible, avoid suddent braking,tyre squealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres. Routinely check the tyres forcuts on the sides, swellings or uneven tread
wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Avoid overloading the vehicle when travelling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.

The Alfa 147 GTA uses Tubelesstyres. Never use an inner tube with thesetyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve.
To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres it is advisable to change over every
10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping themon the same side of the car so as not to reverse the direction of rotation (fig. 12).

If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyreitself, the rim, suspensions and steering system. Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are a signof aging. In any case, if the tyres have beenon the vehicle for over 6 years, they should
be checked by specialised personnel, to see
if they can still be used.

fig. 11

A0A0459m

fig. 12

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear (fig. 11):237

VEHICLE MAINTENANCEWARNING
Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them fromthe right of the car to the left andvice versa.

RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programmeof this chapter. Indeed, ozone, high temperatures and the prolonged lack of fluid in
the system may cause hardening and cracking of the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful control is therefore necessary.

WARNING
Alloy rim painting involving
temperatures exceeding
150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristics
could be impaired.

WINDSCREEN/
REARSCREEN WIPERS
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products; TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:– If the temperature falls below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. If necessary, thaw using an antifreeze product.
– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.
– Do not operate the windscreen andrearscreen wipers on dry glass.

238

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Instructions for refitting thewindscreen wiper blade

SPRAY JETS (fig. 15-16)

To refit the blade proceed as follows:– fit pin (C) into the hole located at the
middle of the blade (B);– place the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.

Changing the windscreen wiper
blade (fig. 13)
Instructions for removing thewindscreen wiper blade

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking levels” in this chapter.
Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.
If necessary, direct the jet of fluid working on the adjustment screw (A).

Changing the rearscreen blade(fig. 14)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCEWARNING
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.

A0A0460m– Raise the cover (A) and remove the armfrom the car, slackening the nut (B) that
fastens it to the pivot pin.

Proceed as follows:– raise the windscreen wiper arm (A);– turn blade (B) 90° around pin (C), set
at the end of the arm;

– Correctly position the new arm and firmly tighten the nut.
– Lower the cover.

– remove the blade from pin (C).
fig. 15
A0A0728m

fig. 13

A0A0227m

fig. 14

fig. 16

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0461m

239

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

HEADLIGHT WASHERS
Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean (fig. 17).
If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.

BODYWORK– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed points:
underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, etc.

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS– Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.

The main causes of corrosion are:– atmospheric pollution– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)

VEHICLE EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTY– seasonal environment conditions.

The Alfa 147 GTA is guaranteedagainst perf oration due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer to the
Warranty Booklet.

Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other vehicles.
On your Alfa 147 GTA, Alfa Romeo
has implemented the best manufacturing
technologies to effectively protect the bodywork against corrosion.
A0A0425m

These include:– Painting products and systems whichgive the vehicle particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.

240 fig. 17

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Paint
The paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.
Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Body paint identification plate” in the “Technical Specifications” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.

Detersives pollute water.
The car should therefore be
washed in areas equipped
for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.

To correctly wash the car:1) Remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in
an automatic system.
2) Spray the vehicle with a low pressure
jet of water.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.
4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet and around the headlights where water may stagnate. The vehicle should not betaken to a closed area immediately, but left
in the open so that residual water can evaporate.

Do not wash the vehicle after it has beenleft in the sun or with the bonnet hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release
give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORKIMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.
Windows
Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.
IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

241

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Engine compartment

INTERIOR FITTINGSAt the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.

Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.

WARNING
Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside
the car. The electrostatic charges
generated when rubbing to clean
may cause fire.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.
– Remove liquid and grease stains witha dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use.
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make
sure that cleaning products do not containalcohol and alcohol derivatives even at low
strength.
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTSIMPORTANT The vehicle should washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged or
removed.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS– Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.
– Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral detergent.

242

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Use appropriate products designed to preserve the appearance of components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument cluster.

WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car. They might explode. Aerosol cans must never be
exposed to a temperature above
50°C. The temperature inside thecar exposed to the sun may go wellbeyond that figure.

IDENTIFICATIONLABELIDENTIFICATIONDATA
You are advised to note the identification
codes. The identification data stamped andgiven on the labels and their position are
the following (fig. 1):
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
4 - Engine label.

This (fig. 2) is to be found on the front
cross member of the engine compartment.
It contains the following information:(A) Space for details of national homologation(B) Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number(C) Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national regulations(D) Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified

A0A0462m

fig. 1BODYWORK LABELThis is located in the engine bay, to one
side of the upper right shock absorber(fig. 3) and contains:– Type of vehicle: ZAR 937.000– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).

A0A0246m

fig. 2

A0A0247m

fig. 3

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine(E) Space for smoke coefficient (Diesel
versions)(F) Space for punching manufacturer’s
name.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONST E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S243

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONSBODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABELThe label (fig. 4) is on the inner left edgeof the tailgate. It contains the following information:
A. Paint manufacturer.
B. Name of colour.

Engine code

Body versions

3.2 V6 24V

932A000

937AXL1B 16C

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

932A000

937AXL11 17C

C. Colour code.
ENGINE STAMP
The engine marking is stamped on the
gearbox side of the crankcase, in correspondence with the exhaust manifold.

A0A0248m

244 fig. 4

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Code type
Cycle
Number and position of cylinders

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

932A000

932A000

Otto

Otto

6 in 60° V

6 in 60° V

Piston bore and strokemm

93 x 78

93 x 78

Total displacement

cm3

3179

3179

kW
HP
rpm

184
250
6200

184
250
6200

Nm
kgm
rpm

300
30.6
4800

300
30.6
4800

NGK R PFR6BNGK R PFR6B

Unleaded petrol 95 RON(Specification EN228)

Unleaded petrol 95 RON(Specification EN228)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSENGINE

Maximum horsepower (EEC):at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs
Fuel

245

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL SUPPLY

SupplyFiring order

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Electronic injection Multi Point

Electronic injection Multi Point

1-4-2-5-3-6

1-4-2-5-3-6

WARNING
Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account of thetechnical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.

TRANSMISSION
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Gearbox

Six forward gears plus reverse all synchronised

Six forward gears plus reverse with electronic control

ClutchDry single disk with hydraulic control

Dry single disk with electrohydraulic control

Drive

Front

Front

246

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Clean, intact spark plugs are determinantwith regard to engine efficiency and for reducing the emission of pollutants.

If examined by an expert eye, the appearance of a spark plug is a sound clue
for locating a fault, even if not involving theignition system. Therefore if you are experiencing any engine problems, it is important to have the spark plugs checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Spark plugs should be replaced at the intervals
specified in the Scheduled
maintenance programme. Only use
spark plugs of the specified type:if the thermal capacity is inadequate or if the envisaged life is notguaranteed inconveniences may ensue.

BRAKES
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Service brakes:– front

Disk self-ventilated– rearDisk

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSPARK PLUGS

Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.
Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gaskets of ecological type.
Controlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.

Parking brake

STEERING
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Type

Rack and pinion.
Hydraulic power steering with fluid reservoir in engine compartment

Turning radius (between pavements)

12.1 m12.1 m247

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEELS
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Standard fittings
Rims

7,5J x 17“Tyres

225/45 ZR17“ 91Y (unchainable tyres)

Optional items
Rims

8J x 18”

Tyres

235/35 R18” 90Y (▼) (unchainable tyres)
215/45 R17” 87W (*)
215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)

Winter tyres

225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S) (unchainable tyres)(*) IMPORTANT Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".
(▼) Size certified and admitted only for YOKOHAMA.

TYRES INFLATION PRESSURES COLD

248

Tyres
225/45 ZR17“ 91Y

Tyres
235/35 R18“ 90Y

Tyres
215/45 R17“ 87W

Tyres
215/45 ZR17“ 87W

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

Reduced load
(2 occupants)

bar

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

Full load

bar

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Alloy rims.
Radial Tubeless tyres.
The Log book shows all the homologatedtyres.
IMPORTANT In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and thevehicle Log Book, only the latter should beconsidered.

CORRECT TYREREADING (fig. 5)
Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the tyre.
The code may be like one of the examples
given below.

While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must be
fitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.

Example:225/45 ZR17 91Y

225 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between sides).
45= Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).

ZR= Radial tyre with speed above
240 kph.

17= Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91

= Load index (capacity).

Y= Maximum speed index.

Load index (capacity)
60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSRIMS AND TYRES

249

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum speed index

CORRECT RIM READING

7.5 = rim width in inches (1)Q = up to 160 km/h

Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped on
the rim, as shown in fig. 5.

J= rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests(2)17= rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)R= up to 170 km/h

S

= up to 180 km/h

T= up to 190 km/h

U = up to 200 km/h
H = up to 210 km/h
V = up to 240 km/h

Example:7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 43

ET 43 = camber angle (distance between disk/rim line and wheel
rim centre line)

W = up to 270 km/h
Y

H2 = “hump“ shape and number (relief
on the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim)

= up to 300 km/h

Maximum speed index
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h
T M + S = up to 190 km/h
H M + S = up to 210 km/h
A0M0465m

250

fig. 5

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWHEEL GEOMETRY
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Front wheels:– camber– 0° 24´ ± 20´– caster4° 6´ ± 30´– toe-in–2 ± 0.6 mm (*) (–18 ± 5)

– camber– 1° 12´ ± 20´– toe-in+2.5 ± 1 mm (*) (23´ ± 9)

Rear wheels:(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossible
to set the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.

PERFORMANCE
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

246 km/h

246 km/h

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h

6.3 s

6.3 s

Kilometer with standing start

26.1 s26.1 sMaximum speed

251

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSDIMENSIONS

A0M0463m

fig. 6
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

4213

925

2546

742

1412

1516

1890

1764

1504

Dimensions are expressed in mm - Height indicated is for an unladen car

252

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Capacity

dm3

280

280

Capacity with rear seat back rest folded

dm3

1030

1030

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

WEIGHTS
Kerb weight

kg

1360

1360

Max. permitted weight (*)

kg

1880

1880

Payload including driver (**)

kg

520

520

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.

253

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSREFILLING
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V
SelespeedSpecified fuels
Recommended products

Fuel tank:– including a reserve oflitreslitres63
7

63
7Unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N(Specification EN228)

Engine coolingsystemlitres9.2

9.2

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU 11(blue) at 50% or PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%

Oil sump and filter

litres

5.90

5.90

SELENIA RACING

Mechanical gearbox/
differential

litres2

2

TUTELA CAR MATRYX

Selespeed hydraulic control system litres–

0.6

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

Windscreen washer and rearscreen
washer fluid reservoir:
litres– with headlamp washer
litres

2.5
5.3

2.5
5.3

Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

254

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use

SAE 10W-60 engine oil synthetic lubricant

Recommended fluids
and lubricantsApplications

SELENIA RACING

A0M0464m

Lubricants for
petrol engines

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

IMPORTANT Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.

255

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Use

Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation

Recommended fluids
and lubricantsApplications

SAE 75W-85 synthetic oil.
Meets API GL 4 and MIL-L-2105 D LEV specifications

TUTELA CAR
MATRYX

Mechanical gearbox anddifferential

ATF DEXRON III type oil

TUTELA CAR
CS SPEED

Selespeed transmission
electrically-operated
electrohydraulic drive“ATF DEXRON II D LEV“, type oil

TUTELA GI/A

Hydraulic power steering

Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.
Consistency NLGI 2

TUTELA MRM 2

C.V. joints

Brake fluid

F.M.V.S.S. n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704
CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid

TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo

Hydraulic brake andclutch control

Protective agent for radiators

Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethylene
glycol, CUNA NC 956-16

PARAFLU 11 (*)

Lubricants and greases
for transmissions

orProtective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylen
glycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications
Windscreen/
rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid

Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.

256

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PARAFLU UP (*)
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL
SC 35

Cooling ducts
Percentage:
50% down to –35°C

To be used neator diluted

The fuel consumption values shown in thefollowing tables were established during homologation tests prescribed in specific European Directives.

– an extraurban cycle: this includes
frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating normal extraurban use of the vehicle;
the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;

The test conditions adopted include the following:– combined consumption: this is calculated by considering a route consisting ofabout 37% urban cycle and 63% extraurban cycle.

– an urban cycle: this includes cold
starting followed by simulation of a mixed
urban route;

WARNING The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions,driving style, conditions of the vehicle, trim level/equipment/ accessories, vehicle load, presence of roof
rack, use of the climate control system, other items that negatively affect the aerodynamics of the vehicle or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption levels thanthose measured by the above-mentioned procedures (see “Reducing
running costs and environment pollution“ in the chapter “Correct useof the car“).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSFUEL CONSUMPTIONCONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO EEC 1999/100/ (litres x 100 km)
3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

Urban

18.1

18.1

Extraurban

8.6

8.6

Combined

12.1

12.1

257

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CO2 EMISSIONSThe CO2 emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)

Value(g/km)

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

287

287

258

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This chapter describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.
For any topic not specifically dealt with in this chapter, refer to the main chapters of this manual which should be thoroughly read to ensurethat the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONRIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

259

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONDASHBOARD

fig. 1
A0A0475m

1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Passenger’s front Air bag - 4. Tailgate release button - 5. Card holder - 6. Radio 7. Centre swivel air vents - 8. Fixed upper vent - 9. Glass holder - 10. Fog lamp button - 11. Hazard warning light switch - 12. Rear fog guard
button - 13. Outer light control lever - 14. Speedometer with mileage recorder and trip recorder and headlamp aiming display - 15. Fuel level
gauge with reserve warning light - 16. Multifunction display - 17. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge - 18. Rev counter - 19. Windscreen/rearscreen wiper control lever - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 22. Ignition key and switch - 23. Horn - 24. Steering wheel locking/release lever - 25. Driver’s front Air bag - 26. Door locking button 27. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 28. Ashtray - 29. Cigar lighter - 30. Temperature sensor - 31 Glovebox.

260

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONINSTRUMENT PANEL

A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warning
light - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer display (mileage recorder, trip meter with headlamp position display) - E. Reconfigurable
multifunction display - F. Rev counter

A0A0476m

fig. 2

261

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONRECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYCONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 3-4)
To make use of the information that the digital display (with the ignition key at MAR) is capable of providing, it is firstly necessary to familiarise with the corresponding control buttons, to be found on the panel at the side of the steering column and on the top of the right lever. You arealso advised to read through the corresponding description in the chapter “Getting to know your car” before doing anything at all.
A0A0305m

To scroll the display and the related options, upwards or to increase the value
displayed depending on the case
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated with Q in the following diagrams to confirm the choice required and move to the next screen
Press for more than 2 seconds indicated with R in the following diagrams
to confirm the choice required and return to the standard screen
To scroll the display and the related options, downwards or decrease the value
displayed according to the casefig. 3
A0A0021m

Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated with T in the following diagrams to move to the next screen
Press for more than 4 seconds indicated with U in the following diagrams, toreset and then start a new journeyfig. 4

262

IMPORTANT Buttons â andãactivate different functions depending on the following
situations:- When the standard screen is activated, they allow adjustment of the inner lighting- Within the menu they allow scrolling up or down
- They make it possible to increase or decrease during setting operations.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Odometer display with double counter for
showing the total and trip meter in miles
and showing the headlamp aiming.
The display shows:To reset the trip meter in miles, keep button (A-fig. 5) on the panel at the side of
the steering column pressed for a few moments.

STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS

IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected the distance of the trip meter is notstored.

The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position in rake and height.

– the miles travelled on the first line (6digits)To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 6)
pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.

– the trip meter in miles on the secondline (4 digits)– at the side the position of the headlamp
aiming device.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONMILEAGE RECORDERWARNINGAny adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out only with thevehicle stationary.
A0A0304m

A0A0307m

fig. 5

fig. 6

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

263

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

WING MIRROR
ADJUSTMENT
Electric adjustment (fig. 7)– use the switch (A) to select the mirror
required (right or left);– pressing the button (B), in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected previously;– Position the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible only with the ignition key at MAR.

A0A0308m

POWER WINDOWS

Driver’s side (fig. 8)

For some versions, the power windows are
fitted with a safety system with crush-prevention seals. The electronic control unit that
operates the system is capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle during thewindow closing motion through the special
seals. Should this occur, the system stops
the movement of the window and reverses
it immediately.

The driver’s door panel contains the buttons that control the following windows,
with the ignition key at MAR:A - left window
B - right window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.

IMPORTANT If the crush-preventionfunction is operated for 3 times in 1 minute,the system automatically sets to the recovery mode (self-protection). To reset the correct system operating logic, use the control
button. The window will rise in predefined
steps until closing completely. The logic is reset and if there are no faults, the window
winder automatically resumes normal operation; if not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.
With the ignition key at STOP or removed,
the power windows remain activated forabout 3 minutes and are deactivated immediately the moment a door is opened.

264 fig. 7

A0A0309m

fig. 8Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IMPORTANT The driver’s power window
is fitted with the “continuous automatic operation” device for both lowering and raising
the window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the window
stops in the required position by pressing either the upper or lower part of the button
again.

The button (A) controls the passenger’s
side window.
IMPORTANT The passenger’s power
window is fitted with the “automatic continuous operation” device for lowering thewindow only. The device works in the same
way as the one on the driver’s side.

WARNING
Improper use of power
windows can be dangerous. Before and during use, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harm either directly by the moving windows or by personal objects drawn
or knocked by them. When leaving
the car, always remove the ignition key to prevent the power
windows from being operated inadvertently, and harming anyone
left on board.

IMPORTANT If the car is fitted withsafety seals, after locking the doors, keeping the corresponding button on the remotecontrol pressed for about 2 seconds the windows and sunroof (if present) are closed automatically. The remote control button must
be kept pressed until the windows havecompleted their stroke, releasing the button
before, the windows stop in the position
they are in at that moment.
On all versions, after unlocking the doors,
keeping the remote control button pressed
for about 2 seconds the windows and sunroof (if present) are opened.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

Passenger’s side (fig. 9)

Do not keep the buttonpressed when the window
is completely raised or
lowered.
A0A0310m

265

fig. 9Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONFRONT SEATSWARNINGAny adjustments are to be
carried out only with thevehicle stationary.

A0A0477m

LENGTHWISE
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)

BACK REST ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)

Raise the lever (A) and push the seat
backwards or forwards; in the driving position the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

Turn the knob (C) until reaching the position required.

WARNING
After releasing the adjustment lever, always checkthat the seat is locked on the runners, trying to move it to and fro.
The lack of this clamping action
could cause the seat to move unexpectedly and cause loss of vehicle control.
DRIVER’S SEATHEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) upwards, then work the lever (up and down)
until reaching the required height, then release it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards then work the lever (up anddown) until reaching the required height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated in the driver’s seat.

266 fig. 10

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TILTING THE BACK REST (fig. 10)(3-door versions)
To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.
A recovery mechanism with memory
makes it possible to take the seat back to
its previous position.
Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that it
is correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indicates that the seat back is not camped.
Also check that the seat is firmly locked on
the runners, trying to move it to and fro.
DRIVER’S SEATLUMBAR ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
Turn the knob (D) until obtaining the most
comfortable position.

DEACTIVATING THE
PASSENGER’SFRONT AIR BAG MANUALLY

The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 11), for the passenger (fig. 12)
and side bag (fig. 13) and window bag(fig. 14).

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
Air bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.
Deactivation takes place using the car ignition key to operate the special switch on
the left hand side of the dashboard

A0A0311m

A0A0478m(fig. 15). Access to the switch is only possible with the door open.
The key-operated switch (fig. 15) has
two positions:1) Passenger’s front Air bag activated:(ON position P) warning light on instrument cluster off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on instrument cluster on; it is possible to carry achild protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONFRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGS

The warning light F on the cluster stays
on permanently until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
Deactivation of the passenger’s front Air bag
does not inhibit operation of the side Air bag.
fig. 11When the door is open, the key can be inserted and removed in both positions.

fig. 13
A0A0312m

fig. 12

A0A0479m

fig. 14

fig. 15

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0313m

267

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
A0A0480m

fig. 16268

1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demisting side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet area
fixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLETS
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 18)

REAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 19)

The vent (1) has an opening/closing control (A).

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.

To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) as
required.

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

CENTRE SWIVEL VENTSADJUSTMENT (fig. 17)
Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).

closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

closed.
•I == Completely
Partially open.

II = Completely open.

II = Completely open.

D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONUPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 17)

To adjust the air flow, use control (C):closed.
•I == Completely
Completely open.

A0A0085m

fig. 17

A0A0315m

fig. 18

fig. 19

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0087m

269

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONINTERIOR FITTINGSCONTROLSGLOVEBOXINERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 22)
This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s door
pillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.
The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.

On the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.
To open use handle (A-fig. 20).

WARNING
Do not travel with theglovebox open: the lid could
harm the passenger in the event ofan accident.

WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset theswitch.
If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system again.

When the glovebox is opened with the ignition key at MAR a courtesy light inside
is turned on (A-fig. 21).
The fitting is completed by a recess (B) on
the lid for inserting a pen or pencil.
A0A0316m

270 fig. 20

A0A0317m

fig. 21

fig. 22

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A0A0318m

WARNING
Do this only with the car
stationary.

The bonnet opening lever is under the left
end of the dashboard.
To open:– pull the lever (A-fig. 23) until the bonnet clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 24) upwards.
– raise the bonnet.
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.

WARNINGDANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.
When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in theengine compartment, take special
care not to bump the head on theraised bonnet.
WARNINGIf checks are needed in theengine compartment, when
it is still hot, do not approach thefan: it might start working alsowith the ignition key removed.
Wait for the engine to cool down.

A0A0481m

A0A0437m

WARNING
Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing might bepulled by moving parts.

WARNINGFor safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.
Always check for proper bonnet
locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONBONNET

To close:– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cm
from the engine compartment and then let
it drop, ensuring that it is fully closed andnot just held in position by the safety catch.
If the bonnet does not close properly do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.

fig. 23

271

fig. 24

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONHEADLIGHTSCOMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 25)
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the backwards
tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be adjusted correctly.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), on
the plate at the side of the steering column:

For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 26)– position 0: one or two people occupying the front seats

The dipped-beam headlights are adjusted
for circulation in the country in which the vehicle is marketed. In countries with opposite
circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehicles it is necessary to cover the areas of theheadlight as shown below; this is done using non-transparent sticker tape.

– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in theboot;– position 3: driver + maaximum permissible load all stowed in
the boot

The illustration refers to the passage fromleft-hand drive to right-hand drive.

– pressing the button in correspondencewith the arrow (A) increases by one position (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);– pressing the button in correspondencewith the arrow (S) decreases by one position (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);
The display (B) in the speedometer shows
the position while adjustment takes place.

WARNING
Check headlight aiming
every time the load carriedchanges.

A0A0320m

272 fig. 25

A0A0321m

fig. 26

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.

WARNING
If a general fuse (MAXIFUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cutsin, do not attempt any repair andcontact an Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service.

WARNING
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE.

WARNING
Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that all theother services are switched off
and/or disengaged.

WARNING
If a fuse blows again, contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.
Access is gained to the control box on thedashboard by slackening the two retainers(A-fig. 27) and removing the protective
trim (B).

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION

IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE

A0A0482m

fig. 27

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

273

ALPHABETICAL INDEXALPHABETICAL INDEX
ABS (Antilock braking system)..... 134
Accessories purchased by the user... 125
Additional operations(maintenance).......................... 224- operation................................

9

Body marking.............................. 243

Annual inspection programme(maintenance).......................... 224

Body versions .............................. 244

Armrest (front) ...........................

18

Additional stop light (third stop) ..... 205

Armrest (rear) ............................

21

Air bags, front and side............

Ashtray35- deactivating passenger’s
side air bags ......................

37- rear ....................................... 123- front air bags .....................

36

ASR (system).............................. 138- general cautions ......................

40

Battery ..................................... 233- passenger’s front air bag...........

37- advice for preserving
the charge .............................. 235- side air bags
(side bag - window bag)...........

- charging.......................... 216-234
38- checking the charge ................. 234

Air cleaner................................... 232- replacement............................ 235

Air re-circulation ........................... 102
Air vents .....................................

90- starting with an auxiliary
battery................................... 216

Alfa Romeo CODE system ..............

6

Body (cleaning)........................... 240

274

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

130

Boot
- capacity ................................. 253- extension ...........................

- front ...................................... 122- right hand drive version ............ 259

Bonnet................................

19-20- lighting .................................. 129- luggage net ............................

21- opening from inside ................. 128- opening with remotecontrol ...............................

8-128- restraining the load .................. 129- tailgate closing ........................ 129- warnings for carrying luggage.... 129
Boot light- changing bulbs ........................ 208
Bose HI-FI system ........................ 172

- checking level and topping up.... 230
Brakes- general information.................. 196- leather seats ........................... 242- types of bulbs ......................... 196- plastic parts ............................ 242

Checking levels ............................ 226- windows ................................ 241- checking fluid level and- checking level and topping

topping up .............................. 230

up brake and clutch fluid........... 230- handbrake .............................. 108- checking level and topping- specifications .......................... 247

Climate control, automaticup coolant fluid ....................... 229- checking level and topping

Braking lights

two-zone..................................

91

Climate control system..............

89- air vents ........................

89-90- controls ..................................

93

Clock..........................................

60

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Brake and clutch hydraulic fluidup engine oil........................... 227- changing bulbs ........................ 205- checking level and topping
Bulbs

up power steering oil................ 229- general instructions .................. 196

Clutch- checking fluid level and- checking level and topping up

topping up .............................. 230- replacement............................ 198

windscreen/rearscreen/- types of bulbs ......................... 196

headlamp washer fluid ............. 231

CODE card...................................

7

Card holder................................ 123

Children (carrying safely) ..............

Catalyst ...................................... 174

Cigar lighter ................................ 122

Controls...................................... 106

Cell phones (provision) ................. 125

Cleaning and maintenance

Correct use of the car............ 175

Changing battery of key withremote control ..........................

10

Changing bulbs- body...................................... 240

Courtesy light .............................. 121- car interior .............................. 242- changing bulbs ........................ 207- engine compartment ................ 242

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

31

CO2 emissions ............................. 258

Cruise control ..............................

47

275

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Dashboard
Left hand drive ............................

Door light.................................... 122
50

Demisting-defrosting- door mirrors ............................ 105- rearscreen .............................. 105- changing bulbs ........................ 206

Electronic alarm system ...............

11

Door locking system ..................... 107- description..............................

11

Door mirrors ................................

- ministerial homologation...........

14

23

Doors

- request for additional keys

- central locking.........................

16

with remote control..................

11- opening/closing from inside......

16- shutting off the system.............

14- opening/closing from outside....

15- switching off ...........................

12- changing front bulbs................. 202- remote control.........................

7- switching on ...........................

11- changing rear bulbs.................. 204- remote locking unlocking ..........

7- volumetric protection................

13- when the alarm is triggered.......

13- windscreen and front side
windows ................................ 104
Direction indicators- changing side bulbs.................. 203- switching on ...........................

43

Display, reconfigurable

Driving- at night .................................. 179

Electronic control units .................. 236- before driving off ..................... 178

Emergency starting....................... 188

multifunction .......................

53- economically and respecting- starting by inertia .................... 190- access to menu screen..............

57

the environment ...................... 183- starting with an auxiliary- control buttons ........................

54- in bad weather (rain, fog) ........ 180

battery................................... 189- dimmer ..................................

75- in the mountains ..................... 180

Emission reducing devices.............. 174- in winter ................................ 181

Engine- display in concurrence276- with ABS ................................ 181

with event ..............................

76- when travelling ....................... 178

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine- identification codes .................. 244

Engine oil consumption ................. 227- specifications .......................... 245

EOBD (system)............................ 139- changing bulbs................. 199-201

Engine codes ............................... 244

Environment (safeguarding) .......... 174- switching on ........................... 106- emission reducing devices ......... 174

Front ceiling light ......................... 120

Engine compartment- bonnet ................................... 130- reducing running costs- washing ................................. 242

and environment pollution......... 181

Engine coolant fluid- changing bulbs ........................ 206
Fuel- running economy..................... 183- automatic shut off switch .......... 107- checking level
and topping up........................ 231- safeguarding emission- consumption ........................... 257- temperature gauge andwarning light...........................

- use of non-toxic materials ......... 174
52

Engine oil

reduction devices ..................... 184

Extending the luggage compartment- fuel cap.................................. 173- level gauge and reserve
warning light...........................

52- partial ....................................

20- checking the level andtopping up .............................. 227- refilling .................................. 173- total ......................................

19

Fuel flap ..................................... 173- consumption ........................... 227

External lights (switching on) ........

42

Fuel reserve ................................

52

First-aid kit................................. 220

Fuel supply (technical data)........... 246- emergency starting .................. 177

Flashing high beams.....................

Fuses- ignition switch.........................

14

Fluids (specifications) ................... 255- in control box in engine- switching off ........................... 176

Fluids and lubricants.............. 255-256

compartment .......................... 210- warming the engine ................. 176

Follow me home device ................

- in control box on battery post .... 211

Engine starting ............................ 175

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

43

44

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Foglights- marking ................................. 244

277

ALPHABETICAL INDEX- in control box on
dashboard .........................

- changing bulbs...................
210- generalities............................. 209- list of protected devices ............ 212- compensation for tilt ................ 133

Interior lighting- boot lighting ........................... 129- front lighting ........................... 120

Headrests
21- rear lighting ............................ 121

Gearshift lever ........................... 109

Heated rearscreen ........................ 105

Key/remote control.................... 6-7

Getting to know your car ....

6

HI-FI system (Bose) ..................... 172- changing remote control battery

Glass stand ................................. 123

Hoses......................................... 238- request for additional keys

Glove compartment ...................... 119

Ignition device ............................

with remote control..................

11

Glove compartment light

Ignition switch and steering

Levers at steering wheel ..............

42

Load limiters (seat belts) ..............

27- changing bulbs ........................ 208- rear .......................................

lock ...................................

14

14-15

Grab handles ............................... 119

In an emergency..................... 188

Handbrake

In the event of an accident ............ 219- lever ...................................... 108
Hazard lights

278

198

- first aid kit.............................. 220- if anybody is injured................. 220

10

Low beam headlights- changing bulbs................. 199-201- switching on ...........................

42

Lubricants (specifications) ............. 255- switching on ........................... 106

Inertial fuel cut off switch.........

107

Luggage rack connections.............. 131

Headlamp beam adjustment .......... 132

Instrument panel ....................

50

Luggage restrainer net ..................

Headlight washers .................. 46-240

Intelligent washing .......................

45

Main beam headlights

Headlights .............................

132

Interior (cleaning) ........................ 242- changing bulbs................. 200-202- adjustment abroad..............

132

Interior fittings........................

- switching on ...........................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

119

21

42

- checking level and topping up.... 229- protection fuse ........................ 171- additional operations................ 224

Power windows ...........................

24- radio section ........................... 153- annual inspection programme.... 224

Pretensioners...............................

28- speakers ................................ 171- checking levels ........................ 226

Radio transmitters- precautions and warnings.......... 225- scheduled maintenance ............ 221- scheduled maintenanceprogramme............................. 222
Mechanical gearbox- lever ...................................... 109

Number plate lights

and cell phones......................... 126
Radio- telephone provision.................. 153
Rain sensor .................................

45

Raising the car- presetting system ................... 140- with arm lift or workshop

Radio with CD player .................... 141

lift ......................................... 220- advice.................................... 141

Rear ceiling light .......................... 121- aerial ..................................... 171- changing bulbs ........................ 207- antitheft protection .................. 144

Rear fog guards- changing bulbs ........................ 205- cautions ................................. 144- changing bulbs ........................ 203

Paintwork (maintenance) ............ 241- CD changer ............................. 168- switching on ........................... 107- colour label............................. 244- CD player section ..................... 165

Rear oddment pockets .................. 124

Parking....................................... 177- controls at steering wheel ......... 149

Rearscreen heating....................... 105

Performance................................ 251- controls on front panel.............. 148

Rearscreen washer .......................

Pockets on doors.......................... 124- functions and adjustments......... 150

Pollen filter ................................ 232- general .................................. 143

Power steering oil- glossary ................................. 145

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Maintenance46- spray jet................................. 239
Rearscreen wiper- blade replacement ................... 239

279

ALPHABETICAL INDEX- operation................................

46

Rearview mirrors- heating ..................................

18

Running economy ........................ 183- rear pockets............................

18

Safe driving ............................... 178- tilting the back rest ..................

17

Seats, rear ..................................

19- boot extension ........................

19- centre armrest.........................

21- headrest.................................

21- external .................................

23- internal ..................................

22

Safeguarding emission reduction
devices .................................... 184

and environment pollution .......... 181

Safeguarding the environment ....... 174

Reducing running costs

Refuelling- specifications .......................... 254

280

Roof rack (provision).................... 131

Scheduled maintenanceprogramme .............................. 222
Seat belts ...................................

25- carrying children safety.............

31- front belt height adjustment ......

27- general instructions ..................

29- load limiters............................

27- maintenance ...........................

30

14- pretensioners ..........................

28

8- use of belts.............................

25

Restraining the load...................... 129

Seats for children .........................

31

Rev counter.................................

51

Seats, front............................

16

Speedometer...............................

Reversing light............................. 203- adjustments.......................

17

Spray jets

Right hand drive .................... 259- centre armrest.........................

18

Remote control ............................

7- additional remote controls.........

11- alarm system ..........................

11- battery changing .....................

10- door opening-closing ................

7- ministerial homologation...........
- tailgate opening ......................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Sidelights- changing front bulbs................. 202- changing rear bulbs.................. 204- changing side bulbs.................. 203- switching on ...........................

43

Snow chains................................ 186
Spark plugs (technical data) .......... 247
Speakers ................................... 171
51- windscreen/rearscreen ............. 239

battery..................................... 189
Steering lock ...............................

15

Steering system

Towing the car ............................. 217

Vehicle identification..................... 243

Trailer towing............................... 185

Vehicle inactivity .......................... 186

Transmission- using again............................. 187- specifications .......................... 246- adjustment lever......................

Vehicle maintenance .............. 221

22

Trip computer ..............................

72

Volumetric protection ....................

13- technical specifications.............. 247

Trip meter reset............................

51

Warning lights ..........................

77

Steering wheel- adjustment lever ................

Tyres
22

Sunroof ...................................... 127

Washing the car- correct reading ........................ 249- FIX&GO kit for quick- engine compartment ................ 242- exterior .................................. 241- emergency manoeuvre ............. 128

tyre repairing .......................... 191- opening-closing........................ 127- inflating pressure ..................... 248- interior ................................... 242- raising at rear.......................... 128- snow chains............................ 186

Weights ...................................... 253

Sun visors ................................... 125- types of tyres and rims ............. 248

WheelsSymbols ..................................... 5-6- winter .................................... 185- FIX&GO kit for quick

Use of non-toxic material............. 174

tyre repairing .......................... 191- opening from inside ................. 128

Useful accessories ........................ 187- geometry ............................... 251- opening with remote

VDC system .............................. 136- snow chains............................ 186

8-128

Vehicle data plate ................... 243-244- tyre inflating pressure............... 248

Technical specifications .......... 243

Vehicle dimensions ....................... 252- tyres and rims.................. 249-250

Tailgate

control ..............................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Starting with an auxiliary281

ALPHABETICAL INDEX- snow chains............................ 186

Windows- cleaning ................................. 241- winter tyres ............................ 185

Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid- checking level
and topping up........................ 231
Windscreen washer- checking fluid level andtopping up .............................. 231- intelligent washing
function..................................

45- operation................................

44- spray jets ............................... 239
Windscreen wiper- blade replacement ................... 239- intelligent washing function.......

45- operation................................

44- rain sensor..............................

45- spray jets ............................... 239
Winter282

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine®

®

Always ask your mechanic for

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your car is factory filled with Selenia Racing

The Selenia range,
satisfies the most sophisticated international specifications. Highly
advanced and tested technical characteristics allow Selenia to bea lubricant able to guarantee the maximum protection and performance of your engine.

SELENIA RACING

SELENIA RACING assicura inoltre:

Iis a lubricant which is particularly suited forcompetition use of T urismo vehicles this lubricant
is the result of the Selenia racing team's lenghtly experience on some of the most importantinternational circuits.
It guarantees maximum protection athigh temperatures

I maximum use of power output;
I constant pressure within lubrication system
in all kinds of application;
I optimum viscosity at the highest of temperatures.
Can be used in aspirated turbocharged
or multivalve petrol engines of any capacity.

The Selenia range includes Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40,
Selenia Turbo Diesel, Selenia WR, Selenia Digitech.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NOTES..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

TYRES INFLATION PRESSURE COLD
Tyres
225/45 ZR17“ 91Y (•)

Tyres
235/35 R18“ 90Y (•) (▼)

Tyres
215/45 R17“ 87W (*)

Tyres
215/45 ZR17“ 87W (*)

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

front

rear

Reduced load
(2 occupants)

bar

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

2.5

2.3

Full load

bar

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

2.8

2.6

(•) Unchainable tyres.
(▼) Size certified and admitted only for YOKOHAMA.
(*) IMPORTANT Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".
Increase the specified pressure by +0.3 bar if the tyre is warm.

With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT
Oil sump and filter

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

5.90

5.90

3.2 V6 24V

3.2 V6 24V Selespeed

litresDo not discard used oil in the environment.

REFFUELLING
Fuel tank capacity

litres63

63

Reservelitres7

7

Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N. (Specification EN228)

AFTER SALESASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALE
Viale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - Italia
Fiat Auto S.p.A.
Publication no. 60431320 - 6th Edition - 01/2005
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Auto S.p.A.

SERVICE

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Alfawiki.nl

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine